2012 Capital Markets Symposium Event Materials - Herrick ...
2012 Capital Markets Symposium Event Materials - Herrick ...
2012 Capital Markets Symposium Event Materials - Herrick ...
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
CURRENT DEVELOPMENTS IN<br />
FEDERAL REGULATION OF<br />
THE CAPITAL MARKETS<br />
LOCATION<br />
<strong>Herrick</strong>, Feinstein LLP<br />
2 Park Avenue (between 32nd and 33rd)<br />
14th Floor<br />
New York, NY
HERRICK, FEINSTEIN LLP’s<br />
SIXTH ANNUAL CAPITAL MARKETS SYMPOSIUM<br />
OCTOBER 2, <strong>2012</strong><br />
CURRENT<br />
DEVELOPMENTS<br />
IN FEDERAL REGULATION<br />
OF THE CAPITAL MARKETS<br />
A distinguished panel of financial and legal<br />
experts, including representatives of<br />
JPMorgan Chase, Barclays, Grant Thornton,<br />
Riverside Risk Advisors LLC and <strong>Herrick</strong>,<br />
Feinstein LLP will assess the current regulatory<br />
developments in federal regulation of capital<br />
markets, including the implementation of the<br />
Volcker Rule, ramifications of the JOBS Act,<br />
and ongoing regulatory developments in the<br />
derivatives markets.<br />
KEYNOTE SPEAKER<br />
JAMES E. GLASSMAN<br />
MANAGING DIRECTOR AND SENIOR ECONOMIST,<br />
JPMORGAN CHASE & CO.<br />
EMMA BAILEY<br />
Director, Barclays <strong>Capital</strong><br />
JOYCE A. FROST<br />
Partner, Riverside Risk Advisors LLC<br />
JAMES E. GLASSMAN<br />
Managing Director & Senior Economist, JPMorgan Chase & Co.<br />
DAVID WEILD<br />
Chairman & CEO, <strong>Capital</strong> <strong>Markets</strong> Advisory Partners<br />
SYMPOSIUM FACULTY<br />
STEPHEN E. FOX<br />
Partner, <strong>Herrick</strong>, Feinstein LLP<br />
RICHARD M. MORRIS<br />
Partner, <strong>Herrick</strong>, Feinstein LLP<br />
PATRICK D. SWEENEY<br />
Partner, <strong>Herrick</strong>, Feinstein LLP
CONTENTS<br />
SPEAKER BIOS...........................................................................................................................................................................1<br />
KEYNOTE SPEECH<br />
BIG LESSONS FROM THE HOUSING DEBACLE...............................................................................................................7<br />
By James E. Glassman<br />
Managing Director & Senior Economist at JPMorgan Chase & Co.<br />
THE REGULATORY OBJECTIVE AND PERSPECTIVE OF THE VOLCKER RULE......................................................15<br />
By Richard M. Morris and Natalia Cavaliere<br />
<strong>Herrick</strong>, Feinstein LLP<br />
THE JOBS ACT.........................................................................................................................................................................41<br />
By Stephen E. Fox, Monica Reyes-Grajales and Liliana Chang<br />
<strong>Herrick</strong>, Feinstein LLP<br />
TRACKING DERIVATIVES REGULATION UNDER DODD-FRANK..............................................................................61<br />
By Patrick D. Sweeney and Julie Albinsky<br />
<strong>Herrick</strong>, Feinstein LLP
SPEAKER BIOS<br />
JAMES E. GLASSMAN<br />
MANAGING DIRECTOR & SENIOR ECONOMIST, JPMORGAN CHASE & CO.<br />
Mr. James E. Glassman is a Managing Director with JPMorgan Chase & Co. and is the<br />
Head Economist for the Commercial Bank where he serves the Company’s bankers and<br />
the Commercial Bank’s clients. He also works closely with the firm’s chief investment<br />
officer, investment banking, and government relations groups. He publishes<br />
independent research on the principal forces shaping the economy and financial<br />
markets and is a long-standing participant in the widely-followed Federal Reserve Bank<br />
of Philadelphia Survey of Professional Forecasters and the National Association of<br />
Business Economists panel of macroeconomic forecasters.<br />
From 1979 through 1988, Mr. Glassman served as a senior economist in the Research &<br />
Statistics and Monetary Affairs divisions at the Federal Reserve Board in Washington<br />
D.C. His responsibilities at the Federal Reserve ranged from analysis and forecasting of<br />
inflation and labor market developments, to analysis of the Federal Reserve’s operating<br />
strategies and interest rate markets, and to development of monetary and reserves<br />
projections. He joined Morgan Guaranty in 1988 and Chemical Bank in 1993 that<br />
through a combination of mergers became JPMorgan Chase & Co.<br />
Mr. Glassman earned a bachelors degree from the University of Illinois,<br />
Champaign-Urbana, Illinois. Subsequently, he was awarded a Ph.D. in economics from<br />
Northwestern University.<br />
1
SPEAKER BIOS<br />
EMMA BAILEY<br />
DIRECTOR, BARCLAYS CAPITAL<br />
JOYCE A. FROST<br />
PARTNER, RIVERSIDE RISK ADVISORS LLC<br />
Joyce Frost is the co-founder of Riverside Risk Advisors, a boutique, independent derivatives advisory firm<br />
located in New York City. Joyce has over twenty-five years of experience in the interest rate, currency and<br />
credit derivatives markets starting her career when the swap market was in its infancy. Between 1986 and<br />
1995 Joyce was responsible for marketing fixed income derivatives to corporate, project finance, real estate<br />
and other end users for The Northern Trust Company, Chase Manhattan Bank and Sumitomo Bank <strong>Capital</strong><br />
<strong>Markets</strong> in New York. She executed hundreds of transactions ranging from plain vanilla swaps to the most<br />
complex crossborder project finance transactions in Latin America. In this capacity, she worked closely with<br />
all areas of the bank including investment banking, credit, risk management, capital markets and trading.<br />
In 1995, Joyce became Head of Marketing for Chase’s newly formed Credit Derivatives Group. Ms. Frost<br />
contributed to the development and execution of the bank’s first credit derivatives transactions, including<br />
total return swaps, credit default swaps, off balance sheet financing vehicles and the market’s first synthetic<br />
CLO. Clients ranged from banks, insurance companies, hedge funds and corporations. As new products<br />
developed, Joyce worked with nearly every department within Chase coordinating and approving all<br />
products and activities with risk management, credit, legal, accounting, treasury, corporate finance and<br />
capital markets. Chase’s Credit Derivatives group was rated “Best in Credit Derivatives for 1997” by Global<br />
Finance Magazine and “Best in Credit Derivatives for 1998” by Derivatives Strategies Magazine in addition<br />
to other premier industry recognitions.<br />
Joyce retired in 2001, but returned to the market in 2006 as Senior Vice President of Cournot <strong>Capital</strong> Inc, the<br />
management company of Cournot Financial Products, LLC (“CFP”), a credit derivatives product company<br />
sponsored by Morgan Stanley. CFP was a highly successful seller of credit protection on senior tranches of<br />
synthetic CDOs that was successfully sold in November 2008. She completed her transition responsibilities<br />
in March, 2009 and formally launched Riverside Risk Advisors in October, 2009.<br />
Joyce is Co-Editor of the Handbook of Credit Derivatives (McGraw Hill, 1999) and author of many articles<br />
published on the use of derivatives by corporations and other end-users. She has spoken at dozens of<br />
industry conferences throughout North and South America and Europe. Joyce earned a B.S. in Finance from<br />
Indiana University Kelly School of Business and an MBA from the University of Chicago Booth School of<br />
Business.<br />
She currently is Chair, Board of Trustees of the Bronx Charter School for Excellence, the highest performing<br />
charter school in New York State, and Secretary of the Board of Directors of New York Cares. She has three<br />
children and lives on the Upper West Side.<br />
Emma Bailey is a Director at Barclays <strong>Capital</strong> in New York and is responsible for legal coverage of all Barclays <strong>Capital</strong>’s principal M&A and<br />
private equity activities in the Americas. Prior to joining Barclays <strong>Capital</strong> in 2008, Ms. Bailey was a senior vice president at Lehman Brothers,<br />
and before that she was an associate at Fried Frank Harris Shriver & Jacobson, where she represented financial institutions in capital markets<br />
and merchant banking transactions, and public M&A clients.<br />
Ms. Bailey has worked on the sale of Lehman Brothers to Barclays <strong>Capital</strong>, Barclays <strong>Capital</strong>’s exit from the mortgage servicing business,<br />
and is coordinating the firm’s response to the Volcker Rule.<br />
2
DAVID WEILD<br />
CHAIRMAN & CEO, CAPITAL MARKETS ADVISORY PARTNERS<br />
David is Chairman and CEO of <strong>Capital</strong> <strong>Markets</strong> Advisory Partners, the firm that works with issuers to<br />
significantly improve the size and quality of institutional demand for their offerings. David also oversees<br />
<strong>Capital</strong> <strong>Markets</strong> at Grant Thornton, the ‘Global Six’ Audit, Tax and Advisory firm and is a former Vice<br />
Chairman and executive committee member of The NASDAQ Stock. He is a noted expert on how stock<br />
market structure impacts capital formation and job creation. He has testified in Congress and at the SEC<br />
on this and other stock market structure issues (e.g., The Flash Crash). Together with Ed Kim, their work<br />
created the rationale that gave rise to The JOBS Act.<br />
David and co-author Ed Kim’s written work was the first to identify how changes in stock market structure<br />
are harming capital formation and job growth in the United States. Their studies (Why are IPOs in the<br />
ICU; Market structure is causing the IPO crisis – and more; A wake up call for America) have been cited in<br />
over 100 articles including The Economist, The Wall Street Journal, The New York Times and The Financial<br />
Times. These studies have also been cited by Congressmen, Senators and the Executive Branch of the U.S.<br />
Government, including most recently in the Interim Report of the White House’s Job Council led by Jeffrey<br />
Immelt, CEO of General Electric, and the IPO Task Force report to the U.S. Treasury led by Kate Mitchell,<br />
former Chairman of the National Venture <strong>Capital</strong> Association. David was also a member of the NYSE and<br />
NVCA’s (National Venture <strong>Capital</strong> Association) Blue Ribbon Panel to restore liquidity in the US venture<br />
capital industry and his work was cited in the NVCA’s final report. David has testified in Congress and at<br />
the CFTC-SEC Joint Panel on Emerging Regulatory Issues and his studies served as the impetus for the The<br />
JOBS Act (HR 3606). David attended the signing of The JOBS Act by President Obama in the Rose Garden<br />
of the White House on April 5, <strong>2012</strong>.<br />
While at NASDAQ, David created the “Market Intelligence Desk” and the “Corporate Client Services Network”<br />
which are the two core services offerings that NASDAQ continues to rely on to serve its listed companies.<br />
He spent 14 years at Prudential Securities in senior management roles, including President of<br />
PrudentialSecurities.com, Head of Corporate Finance (where he tripled revenue and doubled productivity<br />
per investment banker over three years), Head of Technology Investment Banking and Head of Global<br />
Equity <strong>Capital</strong> <strong>Markets</strong> (where his department ranked #1 in a poll of other equity syndicate professionals<br />
for two years running). He oversaw more than 1,000 IPO's, Follow-on offerings and convertible transactions<br />
and was an innovator in new issue systems and transaction structures and was behind a number of<br />
innovations in the equity capital markets including, “Capped jump-ball” institutional pots, incentive<br />
underwriting structures, the “Evergreen” diligence process that underlies most modern follow-on offerings,<br />
the first use of algorithms to improve the quality of retail distribution on new issues and the first<br />
“Accelerated book build” transaction.<br />
David holds an MBA from the Stern School of Business and a BA from Wesleyan University. He studied on<br />
exchange at The Sorbonne, Ecole des Haute Etudes Commerciales and The Stockholm School of Economics.<br />
He is Chairman of the Board of Tuesday’s Children, the pre-eminent charity providing services to 9/11<br />
families and first responders and has served on that board since shortly after 9/11.<br />
3
SPEAKER BIOS<br />
STEPHEN E. FOX<br />
PARTNER, HERRICK, FEINSTEIN LLP<br />
Stephen's practice focuses on advising domestic and foreign public and private entities on corporate and<br />
securities matters, with a particular emphasis on public company securities law compliance, securities<br />
offerings and mergers and acquisitions (including reverse mergers into public shells). Stephen also<br />
represents private investment funds and their managers with respect to fund formation and compliance,<br />
and strategic investments on behalf of private investment funds. Stephen frequently serves as outside<br />
corporate counsel to his clients, managing all aspects of a company's legal needs.<br />
Stephen represents emerging growth and middle market clients in their ongoing securities law compliance<br />
and corporate governance matters, including the preparation and review of periodic reports, proxy<br />
statements and other documents filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission. He also represents<br />
issuers in all kinds of registered and unregistered offerings of debt and equity securities, including initial<br />
and secondary public offerings, alternative public offerings and PIPEs offerings, and private placements<br />
pursuant to Regulation D and Rule 144A.<br />
Stephen also represents individual and institutional fund managers in establishing and operating hedge<br />
funds and private equity funds, both domestic and offshore, as well as structuring and negotiating seed<br />
investor agreements, derivative transactions and other corporate transactions associated with establishing,<br />
operating and winding up private investment funds.<br />
RICHARD M. MORRIS<br />
PARTNER, HERRICK, FEINSTEIN LLP<br />
Richard Morris works closely with the executive management of middle market companies and funds to<br />
enhance and implement acquisition, financing, operation and exit strategies and to solve a broad range<br />
of commercial and regulatory issues. Financial institutions, investment funds, and investment management<br />
professionals have the benefit of Richard's more than 25 years of transactional experience in such areas as<br />
corporate finance, institutional investment, mergers and acquisitions, hedge fund investment, corporate<br />
governance, and executive employment and benefits.<br />
Richard applies his "Wall Street" certified public accountant and operations experience to our clients'<br />
problems, providing practical solutions that improve operations and risk management. He speaks on a<br />
variety of subjects, including fiduciary duties of board members and investment professionals, improving<br />
company risk management environments and commercial workout and exit strategies. Richard works<br />
closely with the New York State Society of CPAs Committee on Anti-Money Laundering and Counter<br />
Terrorist Financing, focusing on the Bank Secrecy Act and related issues.<br />
Prior to joining <strong>Herrick</strong>, Richard was a corporate associate with Schulte Roth & Zabel. He began his legal<br />
career as a tax, then corporate, associate at Shearman & Sterling. Prior to becoming a lawyer, Richard was a<br />
regulatory auditor with the Commodities Exchange in New York and specialized in operations and financial<br />
management at Kidder Peabody. He also was the U.S. Audit Manager for the financial division for a<br />
diversified Australian company.<br />
4
PATRICK D. SWEENEY<br />
PARTNER, HERRICK, FEINSTEIN LLP<br />
Patrick D. Sweeney is Chairperson of <strong>Herrick</strong>'s Investment Management Practice Group. He represents<br />
investment managers, investment funds and investment fund fiduciaries in a wide range of corporate,<br />
regulatory and transactional matters. Pat also represents major institutional investors in corporate debt<br />
restructuring and non-U.S. investors in inbound investments.<br />
Prior to joining <strong>Herrick</strong>, Pat practiced investment management law in-house for more than 10 years, first<br />
as senior investment counsel for Merrill Lynch Asset Management and then as General Counsel to Nomura<br />
Corporate Research and Asset Management. He began practicing law in association with Shearman &<br />
Sterling in the 1980's, where he represented financial institutions in corporate, securities and finance<br />
transactions.<br />
Pat has been an active member of the New York City Bar Investment Management Committee and the<br />
Investment Company and Investment Adviser Subcommittee of the American Bar Association's Business<br />
Law Section, and has participated for many years in committees, conferences and panel presentations of<br />
the Investment Company Institute, the Loan Syndications and Trading Association, the Mutual Fund<br />
Directors Forum and many other investment management industry organizations.<br />
5
HERRICK, FEINSTEIN LLP’s<br />
SIXTH ANNUAL CAPITAL MARKETS SYMPOSIUM<br />
OCTOBER 2, <strong>2012</strong><br />
KEYNOTE:<br />
BIG LESSONS FROM<br />
THE HOUSING DEBACLE<br />
BY JAMES E. GLASSMAN
The Housing Debacle<br />
The speculative frenzy that drove house prices far beyond anything we’ve ever seen by 2006,<br />
referring to fundamental benchmarks of affordability and customary standards used to<br />
qualify borrowers for a mortgage loan, did considerable damage to the economy. We are still<br />
recovering from that traumatic event four years later and it may take the rest of the decade<br />
for the economy to fully regain its health. Business cycles are a common feature of modern<br />
economies: this one is the 48 th the US economy has suffered since George Washington was<br />
inaugurated on Wall Street on April 30, 1989, according to the National Bureau of Economic<br />
Research (the referee of such events). Business downturns usually are triggered by unique<br />
events and so are hard to predict. But this one was tragic, because it could have been<br />
avoided. Observers should have known, and many claimed they did, that something was<br />
amiss, when from 2003 to 2008 the national level of house prices rose to levels that were 55<br />
percent higher than anything we had ever seen relative to income.<br />
The speculative debacle damaged our economy and it also tarnished the reputation of<br />
market systems and our particular that of the United States. It would be a shame if we<br />
condemned the system, which works because it has many checks and balances, rather than<br />
the human failings for the crisis. Our market-based system has lifted America’s living standard<br />
far above most others. And it would be a shame if we blame the economic liberalization of<br />
recent decades that has pushed us ahead of all of our competition except the sleeping giants<br />
who catching up with us only because they are stepping out of the Middle Ages.<br />
Congress has passed sweeping reform initiatives and international regulators have pushed for<br />
new guidelines. Their efforts likely will make our financial system stronger, although they<br />
come at a cost. But the most important steps will come from the mistakes we made.<br />
A Dispassionate Taxonomy of the Housing Debacle<br />
Take a minute to recall the key features of the housing crisis. There were many culprits,<br />
beyond those that work on Wall Street.<br />
(1) The usual (and unusual) suspects:<br />
Lax lending standards and the innovative tools Wall Street created to meet global<br />
investors’ appetites for yield, which they found in housing-backed vehicles, gave the<br />
housing industry easy access to cheap credit, even when valuations climbed to<br />
unprecedented levels. So, of course, Wall Street deserves its fair share of criticism. But<br />
Wall Street had many willing partners.<br />
The rating agencies, with their top ratings assigned to subprime CDOs, for example,<br />
opened the door to investor groups whose charters limit their risk exposures. Did the<br />
rating agencies not think about what would happen to those ratings if house prices<br />
dropped<br />
9
Speculators were important actors. Did the folks who put little of their own money in a<br />
house transaction, or who used home equity credit lines to spend the equity in their<br />
houses, really not know what was going on<br />
The builders likely knew what was going on. They claimed they had adequate rules in<br />
place to limit purchases by speculators who had no intention of living in the places<br />
they were buying. But cautious builders benefit little by holding back in a housing<br />
boom, because there will be little business for them to pick up in the subsequent bust.<br />
At the end of the day, investors are the ultimate check and balance, because it is their<br />
funds that are on the line. The appetite for risk assets at small spreads surely was the<br />
ultimate enabler of the housing debacle.<br />
(2) Collateralized lending: “Liar loans”—low-doc, no-doc, and stated loans by any<br />
other name—are the poster child of lax lending. But such products come with the<br />
territory, as the popularity of NIV loans—the acronym for “No Income<br />
Verification”—during the 1980s real estate bubble demonstrates. It is easier to<br />
ignore the creditworthiness of the borrower when the outlook for collateral is<br />
strong. This is unique to real estate lending, because lenders make no assumptions<br />
about car prices when they underwrite subprime car loans.<br />
(3) National housing policies strongly favor homeownership. The unspoken<br />
assumption appears to be that homeownership promotes social cohesion.<br />
Housing policies generously treat capital gains accruing to primary residences<br />
(Taxpayer Relief Act of 1997), provide tax deductions for mortgage financing costs<br />
and property taxes, and support several government sponsored agencies that can<br />
raise funds at Treasury-like rates to provide default insurance and invest in<br />
portfolios of mortgage backed securities.<br />
(4) Regulatory policy, in contrast to lean-against-the-wind monetary policy, is procyclical<br />
and that tends to amplify credit cycles. The financial system needs a<br />
safeguard when times are good, not when times are tough and financial<br />
institutions are vigilant. Regulators talk about macro-prudential policies, to temper<br />
this pro-cyclical bias, but in truth this is a daunting challenge.<br />
(5) Credit default swaps, which enable risk takers to hedge specific credit exposures,<br />
are a highly beneficial innovation. Their role in the AIG losses were the result of<br />
faulty management of risk exposure at that company and the absence of a<br />
backstop, like a clearinghouse, to cover their losses not faulty financial<br />
instruments.<br />
(6) The failure of the market to price “strategic defaults” as prices rose to<br />
unprecedented levels surely fueled the speculative fury. The market failed because<br />
investors had no history of strategic defaults of the scale we saw. Indeed, the<br />
historical absence of a decline in the national level of house prices was cited as a<br />
justification for optimism even in the face of extraordinary rises in prices. If market<br />
10
participants had understood what could happen when the music stopped,<br />
mortgage rates would have climbed as house prices rose to reflect a risk premium<br />
for strategic defaults.<br />
On the other hand, popular opinions about what went wrong often include arguments that in<br />
my opinion are red herrings.<br />
(1) You can’t have a conversation about the housing debacle without getting into<br />
arguments about moral hazard and the danger of financial institutions that are too<br />
big to fail. That assumption underpins the Basle III additional capital buffers for<br />
systemically important financial institutions. Moral hazard is a red herring: the<br />
wealth of the financial industry’s risk takers is heavily concentrated in the equity of<br />
their companies; they are first in line when an institution fails. No one takes risks on<br />
the assumption that the regulators will bail them out, because they know that, by<br />
the time the regulators have to step in, their own financial stake will suffer. And, of<br />
course, large financial institutions are key for the economy and the financial<br />
system, given the complex interconnectedness of the system, but, because they<br />
are generally better diversified than small financial institutions, they pose less<br />
danger to the economy than if they were carved up into smaller units that are not<br />
well diversified. And fears of “big” ignore the complex needs of global business<br />
customers and the benefits associated with scale economies in risk management.<br />
(2) Some claim the housing crisis was caused by monetary policy in the last cycle,<br />
keeping interest rates too low for too long. Monday Morning Quarterbacks who<br />
make this claim forget the frightening events the Fed was dealing with at the time,<br />
including the fears around the Y2K drama, the telecom bust that destroyed $100<br />
billion of bond wealth, the 9/11 shock, the earnings fiascos that led to Sarbanes-<br />
Oxley, and the Iraq War. These criticisms are off base, because countercyclical<br />
monetary policy, what comes in bad times, doesn’t fuel speculative bubbles. Those<br />
are born in optimistic times. Apparently, the Fed disagrees, based on what we see<br />
now. Moreover, if easy Fed policy was the culprit, where was the bond market<br />
Bond investors are free to make up their own mind about the risks. In fact, longterm<br />
interest rates remained low even as the Fed tightened back then, prompting<br />
comments that bond yields were a “conundrum”.<br />
(3) Many believe the absence of “skin in the game” makes the financial system<br />
vulnerable to speculative bouts. This is an exaggeration. If everyone is minding<br />
their store, acting in our own self interest in fact serves the interests of our<br />
customers, our shareholders, our creditors, our employers, the broad economy.<br />
That is a fundamental underpinning of a competitive market economy. Market<br />
economies aren’t perfect. They fail in the presence of externalities—when property<br />
rights don’t fully capture the indirect effects of our activity on others. But they<br />
don’t fail just because we have no “skin in the game”. Everyone has “skin in the<br />
game” if they hope to provide services that customers will use.<br />
11
The Dodd-Frank/Basle III Financial Reform Effort<br />
Regulatory reforms introduced by the Dodd-Frank financial reform bill and new guidelines for<br />
capital buffers and liquidity coming from the Basle III group of international bank regulators<br />
addresses some of these weaknesses in the banking system.<br />
The key initiatives call for bigger capital buffers to absorb losses, greater attention to liquidity,<br />
and tighter rules on activities some believe contributed to the financial crisis. (1) <strong>Capital</strong><br />
cushions have been raised, with Tier 1 tangible common equity bumped up from 4% to 7% of<br />
assets. (2) Systemically important financial institutions are to hold additional buffers<br />
depending on their size. (3) A larger proportion of bank assets will have to be held in liquid<br />
forms (Liquidity Coverage Ratios are still in flux). (4) Banks are required to maintain “living<br />
wills” to provide for an orderly unwind in the event of a failures (the Financial Stability<br />
Oversight Council will oversee this and will have some say over nonbank institutions and<br />
regulators will have the authority to manage an orderly liquidation modeled on the FDIC<br />
process that can take failing institutions into receivership and restructure them without<br />
significant disruption to the broader financial system, force creditors and shareholders to bear<br />
all losses, replace management, and do this without using taxpayer funds). (5) The law<br />
created a consumer regulator. And (7) the Dodd-Frank reform bill requires financial firms to<br />
use derivatives clearinghouses where traders post capital—the requirements are higher for<br />
firms with larger positions that could pose a greater systemic risk—once a contract is open to<br />
cover potential losses. This limits a firm’s exposure (most derivatives that go through a<br />
clearinghouse must be traded through a regulated exchange or on a trading platform that<br />
meets specific requirements in order to make the pricing more transparent). Nonfinancial<br />
firms that use derivatives to hedge business risks—like an airline that buys oil swaps to limit<br />
its exposure to fluctuating prices—are typically exempt from the above regulations. (8) The<br />
Dodd-Frank bill limits proprietary trading by deposit-taking institutions (the Gramm-Leach-<br />
Bliley Act of 1999 repealed the Glass-Steagall Act’s prohibition of proprietary trading by<br />
deposit-taking institutions but the proposed Volcker rule provides that financial firms backed<br />
by government deposit insurance, even if the costs of that insurance are born by banks and<br />
its depositors, should not be permitted to trade speculatively for their own benefit).<br />
Surely, the financial reform effort will strengthen the financial system. Nonetheless, it focuses<br />
solely on the banking industry. To the extent that other factors contributed to the housing<br />
debacle, it does not address those weaknesses.<br />
Conclusion: Learning From Mistakes, the Best Reforms<br />
The sponsors and architects of the financial reform effort have pushed through sweeping<br />
financial reform measures, hoping to avoid a repeat of the housing debacle that did so much<br />
damage to the economy. It remains to be seen how well it will work. Past efforts to “fix”<br />
problems have a mixed record. Take the Glass-Steagall Act that was passed in response to the<br />
1930s banking crisis. It separated commercial banking from investment banking on the<br />
12
assumption that the system would be safer if the riskier parts of the financial services industry<br />
were partitioned from the deposit-taking business. In fact, many blame the breakdown of<br />
Glass-Steagall barriers for the housing crisis. The opposite may be the case: Glass-Steagall Act<br />
may have enabled the housing crisis by creating a class of financial service companies—<br />
investment banks—that could operate at twice the leverage of the commercial banks and<br />
were regulated by the Securities Exchange Commission, out of sight of the Federal Reserve<br />
System. That is one reason why there was a run on the investment banks in the wake of<br />
Lehman Brothers’ collapse. Commercial banks, which operate at much lower levels of<br />
leverage, fared relatively well and today are generously cushioned today.<br />
It is unrealistic to assume that we can draft regulations that will any prevent speculative<br />
excesses and that can regulate safety. And it is doubtful that Congress will radically alter our<br />
national housing policies, which many blame for some of the excesses of the housing<br />
debacle. That would face a high political hurdle, in part, because the value of the nation’s<br />
stock of housing reflects the existing tax treatment of housing. To alter that would cause<br />
substantial real estate losses. And it is doubtful that we can or will find ways to prevent<br />
financial institutions from thinking about the outlook for collateral when underwriting loans.<br />
In truth, that doesn’t matter, because the best protection we have against a repeat of the<br />
housing debacle is the lessons we have learned from the mistakes we make, the “fool me<br />
once …” idea. Never again will market participants, investors, risk managers, financial<br />
engineers, and rating agencies be able to assume that house prices do not fall at the national<br />
level. Now we will have to be mindful of the potential for mortgage borrowers to accept<br />
strategic defaults should prices fall and drive them under water. If financial markets have<br />
learned their lessons, and that seems like a reasonable assumption, mortgage spreads would<br />
widen to reflect the risk of strategic defaults should house prices ever rise out of line with<br />
customary benchmarks of affordability. <strong>Markets</strong> should bring a discipline that was absent in<br />
the last decade’s housing debacle.<br />
(c) <strong>2012</strong> JPMorgan Chase & Co. All rights reserved. The material contained herein is intended as a general<br />
market commentary. Opinions expressed herein are those of James Glassman and may differ from those of other<br />
J.P. Morgan employees and affiliates. This information in no way constitutes J.P. Morgan research and should not<br />
be treated as such. Further, the views expressed herein may differ from that contained in J.P. Morgan research<br />
reports. The above summary/prices/quotes/statistics have been obtained from sources deemed to be reliable,<br />
but we do not guarantee their accuracy or completeness.<br />
13
HERRICK, FEINSTEIN LLP’s<br />
SIXTH ANNUAL CAPITAL MARKETS SYMPOSIUM<br />
OCTOBER 2, <strong>2012</strong><br />
THE REGULATORY OBJECTIVE AND<br />
PERSPECTIVE OF THE VOLCKER RULE<br />
BY RICHARD M. MORRIS AND NATALIA CAVALIERE
I. Introduction<br />
The part of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act<br />
(the “Dodd-Frank Act”) commonly referred to as the Volcker Rule is the latest component of a<br />
comprehensive U.S. bank regulatory regime designed to reduce specified risk exposure of<br />
banks and related financial institutions. The fundamental purpose of the Volcker Rule is to<br />
implement the Congressional directives under Title VI of the Dodd-Frank Act, referred to as<br />
the Bank and Savings Association Holding Company and Depository Institution Regulatory<br />
Improvements Act of 2010, which are intended to: (i) eliminate certain proprietary trading<br />
and investment activities by depository institutions and certain specified affiliates; and (ii)<br />
implement additional limitations to mitigate the risks associated with such activities in other<br />
specified entities. The Dodd-Frank Act provides a two-prong approach to restrict permitted<br />
operations of banks and other nonbank financial institutions that are subject to the<br />
regulatory oversight of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System.<br />
Except as otherwise permitted:<br />
<br />
<br />
Banking entities shall not “(A) engage in proprietary trading; or (B) acquire<br />
or retain any equity, partnership, or other ownership interest in or sponsor a<br />
hedge fund or a private equity fund”; and<br />
Nonbank financial institutions supervised by the Federal Reserve Board<br />
shall be subject to additional capital requirements and additional<br />
quantitative limits that will be specified by the applicable regulatory<br />
agency with respect to their proprietary trading operations or investments<br />
in hedge funds or private equity funds.<br />
The statute broadly defines “banking entity”. The definition includes the<br />
depository institution (what is commonly thought of as the bank), the bank holding company<br />
and their respective subsidiaries and affiliates. Accordingly, a separate entity organized to<br />
conduct proprietary trading that is a subsidiary or otherwise an affiliate of a bank would be<br />
included in the scope of the statute.<br />
The regulatory objective was summarized by The Hon. Paul Volcker, former<br />
Chairman of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, in his testimony to the<br />
Senate Banking Committee when he urged the adoption of this provision:<br />
What we can do, what we should do, is recognize that curbing the<br />
proprietary interests of commercial banks is in the interest of fair<br />
and open competition as well as protecting the provision of<br />
essential financial services. Recurrent pressures, volatility and<br />
uncertainties are inherent in our market-oriented, profit-seeking<br />
financial system. By appropriately defining the business of<br />
commercial banks . . . we can go a long way toward promoting the<br />
17
combination of competition, innovation, and underlying stability<br />
that we seek. (emphasis added)<br />
In many respects, the Volcker Rule evokes the objectives of the Glass-Steagall<br />
Act (formally named the Banking Act of 1933) that formed the Federal Deposit Insurance<br />
Corporation and prohibited commercial banks from specified investment banking activities.<br />
Both the Glass-Steagall Act and the Dodd-Frank Act re-defined the scope of permitted<br />
activities of commercial banks to require a more stable institution with a core business model<br />
of taking deposits and making loans. The Glass-Steagall Act was substantially modified by in<br />
1999 by the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act, which permits certain bank holding companies to<br />
promote their regulatory status to a financial holding company, thereby allowing non-bank<br />
business activities, such as investment banking and insurance activities. It is the Gramm-<br />
Leach-Bliley Act that created the concept that certain financial institutions are “too big to fail”.<br />
Both the Glass-Steagall Act and the Dodd-Frank Act were enacted after an unprecedented<br />
and unforeseen collapse of the financial markets, wide-spread unemployment and significant<br />
loss in public confidence in the ability and integrity of the financial markets and commercial<br />
banking industry; and both statutes sought to restore the public’s confidence in the ability<br />
and integrity of the commercial banking industry by limiting permitted activities by specified<br />
financial institutions, eliminating or mitigating risks deemed to be unnecessary and otherwise<br />
promoting (and, to a certain extent, mandating) safe and sound banking practices.<br />
The Volcker Rule became effective on July 21, <strong>2012</strong>, notwithstanding that the<br />
final rules that will interpret many of its core elements were not, and have not yet been,<br />
issued. Adopting the final rules has taken considerably longer than the timeline envisioned<br />
by Congress under the Dodd-Frank Act, which was:<br />
Scheduled Date<br />
January 21, 2011 or six months<br />
after the date on which the<br />
Dodd-Frank Act was enacted.<br />
Nine months after the<br />
Council’s recommendations<br />
are provided (which should<br />
have been no later than<br />
October 21, 2011).<br />
July 21, 2014.<br />
Action<br />
Council study and recommendations for the<br />
implementation of the Volcker Rule. The<br />
recommendations were released on January<br />
18, 2011. See<br />
http://www.treasury.gov/initiatives/docume<br />
nts/volcker%20sec%20%20619%20study%2<br />
0final%201%2018%2011%20rg.pdf<br />
Adoption of the final rules by the Agencies<br />
to implement the Volcker Rule.<br />
Expiration of the conformance period for<br />
entities to comply with the Volcker Rule.<br />
18
July 21, 2015<br />
July 21, 2016<br />
July 21, 2017<br />
Expiration of the separate three one-year<br />
extensions of the conformance period for<br />
entities to comply with the Volcker Rule.<br />
Each extension is granted to an entity at the<br />
discretion of the Federal Reserve.<br />
Regulatory guidance on the scope of the restrictions applicable to banks and<br />
other specified covered financial institutions under the Volcker Rule is provided mostly by the<br />
proposed rules (“Proposed Rules”) that were jointly issued on October 11 and 12, 2011 by the<br />
Office of the Comptroller of the Currency (which is part of the U.S. Department of the<br />
Treasury), the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, the Federal Deposit<br />
Insurance Corporation and the Securities Exchange Commission. These agencies, together<br />
with the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (or CFTC), which provided substantively<br />
identical proposed rules on January 11, <strong>2012</strong>, are the federal “Agencies” that are tasked with<br />
developing and enforcing the appropriate rules and regulations to implement the Volcker<br />
Rule.<br />
The Agencies are now considering more than 18,000 comments received to the<br />
Proposed Rules. Some commentators expect that the final Volcker Rule will be adopted later<br />
this year. Adopting the final rules has proved difficult for the Agencies who must navigate<br />
through competing influences, including those at senior levels of our Federal government,<br />
numerous industry participants, and a variety of industry and special interest groups.<br />
Congressional actions that seek to modify, the Volcker Rule create additional complications<br />
to the development of the final rules. House Financial Services Committee Chairman Spencer<br />
Bachus (R-Ala.) has announced that this Committee will hold hearings and is considering<br />
introducing legislation to make substantial changes to the Volcker Rule. Representative<br />
Bachus has publicly stated that the current version of the Volcker Rule will deal “devastating”<br />
repercussions to the economy and said he is anxious to hear from investors and other<br />
members of the public on how the rule should be changed to create a less “burdensome”<br />
alternative to the regulatory standards proposed by the Agencies. On the other end of the<br />
spectrum, Senators Carl Levin (D-Mich.) and Jeff Merkley (D-Ore.), who authored the Volcker<br />
Rule language in the Dodd-Frank Act, have advocated that the Proposed Rules released by<br />
the Agencies have left too many “loopholes” that may be exploited by banks and other<br />
financial institutions and that there should be a more stringent standard to limit the scope of<br />
proprietary trading and investment activities.<br />
In light of these competing and apparently irreconcilable forces, the Agencies<br />
are guided by the express statutory mandate and the recommendations developed by the<br />
plain language of the statute and the Financial Stability Oversight Council (the “Council”), a<br />
multi-federal level body that was created by the Dodd-Frank Act to assess the risks to the U.S.<br />
financial systems, guide and coordinate regulatory rulemaking and otherwise promote safe<br />
and sound banking and financial institutional practices. The Council is also tasked to<br />
“promote market discipline, by eliminating expectations on the part of shareholders,<br />
19
creditors, and counterparties of financial institutions that the U.S. government will shield<br />
them from losses in the event of failure.” That is, change the landscape to end the era of<br />
taxpayer bailouts for financial institutions that have been deemed “too big to fail”. The<br />
Volcker Rule promotes the argument that reducing the proprietary trading risk of financial<br />
institutions will promote more stable financial markets. In this regard, the Volcker Rule is not<br />
attempting to remedy one of the driving causes of the 2007 financial markets collapse or the<br />
“Great Recession”, a fact that was noted by Representative Barney Frank, as ranking Democrat<br />
of the House Financial Services Committee, during his opening statements to the hearings on<br />
the Volcker Rule. The Volcker Rule responds to a perceived systemic risk that threatens the<br />
banking system and financial markets in order to avoid a repeat of the 2007 financial markets<br />
collapse . Representative Frank has previously noted that proprietary trading and typical<br />
financial industry compensation arrangements unacceptably add to the systemic risk of the<br />
financial markets as executives are able to keep a portion of the profits from proprietary<br />
trading (heads - they win) and the taxpayers are required to bail out the financial institutions<br />
for proprietary trading losses (tails – we the taxpayers lose). The goal is to create more stable,<br />
less risky (as one bank executive noted, “boring”) commercial banking operations that uses<br />
the benefit of their unique status or bank license to prudently make loans and promote the<br />
U.S. economy.<br />
II.<br />
Regulatory Perspective<br />
An understanding of the Volcker Rule requires a review of its regulatory<br />
perspective as well as its regulatory objective. The Volcker Rule is one of the more recent<br />
regulatory actions that restrict the banking and financial services industry. The banking<br />
industry is one of the more regulated businesses in the U.S. There are many types of entities<br />
that are commonly referred to as banks. Often consumers think of a bank as an organization<br />
with the plate glass window and tellers that accepts deposits and make loans. These entities<br />
include commercial banks, industrial banks, EDGE corporations, savings and loan associations,<br />
savings banks, thrifts and credit unions. For convenience, these different types of entities are<br />
each referred to as a “bank.” The distinctions between these types of banks include the scope<br />
of bank businesses and related activities that are permitted under their respective charters, as<br />
well as capital structure and the applicable primary regulatory authorities. The Proposed<br />
Rules broadly define a “banking entity” for the purposes of the Volcker Rule and the definition<br />
includes all of these types of banks.<br />
The statutory definition includes any insured depository institution<br />
(other than certain limited purpose trust institutions), any company<br />
that controls an insured depository institution [that is, a bank<br />
holding company or financial holding company], any company that<br />
is treated as a bank holding company for purposes of section 8 of<br />
the International Banking Act of 1978 (12 U.S.C. 3106), and any<br />
affiliate or subsidiary of any of the foregoing.<br />
20
Banks are subject to the regulation and oversight of the applicable primary<br />
regulator, such as the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency (or OCC), the Federal Deposit<br />
Insurance Corporation (or FDIC) or state bank regulatory authorities such as the New York<br />
State Department of Financial Institutions. Credit unions are subject to the authority of the<br />
National Credit Union Administration or the applicable state authority. Bank holding<br />
companies, including financial holding companies that under the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act are<br />
permitted to hold non-bank subsidiaries, are subject to the oversight of the Federal Reserve<br />
Board. Non-U.S. banking institutions that have a type of banking office that is subject to U.S.<br />
regulatory authority, such as an agency office, branch or subsidiary, are generally subject to<br />
the applicable state bank regulatory authority unless they elect to be subject to the OCC and<br />
oversight of the Federal Reserve Board. Additionally, banks that maintain insured deposits<br />
are subject to regulatory oversight by an applicable agency, such as the FDIC. Additional<br />
regulatory restrictions are provided under the Basle Accords (internationally agreed bank<br />
standards) and banks may also be subject to oversight of non-U.S. regulators depending<br />
upon the non-U.S. business that is conducted by the U.S. based bank and the scope of the<br />
non-U.S. regulatory regime. Additional regulatory authority is provided under: (i) the Real<br />
Estate Settlements Procedures Act of 1974 (or RESPA), which provides significant regulatory<br />
policies and procedures applicable to the residential mortgage industry, including servicing<br />
standards and consumer disclosures (which was amplified by the regulations promulgated by<br />
the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development and is now enforced by the<br />
Consumer Financial Protection Bureau); and (ii) numerous state and local laws. For example,<br />
the New York State ATM Safety Act regulates the ATM security precautions required by banks.<br />
One professor at a well-known New York law school compared the organization and<br />
reporting structure between and among the bank regulatory authorities and the different<br />
types of banks to a bowl of spaghetti. In summary, banks are accustomed to the broad<br />
reaching and detailed policies and procedures that are mandated by governmental<br />
authorities and agencies that affect virtually every aspect of their business operations. The<br />
scope of the Volcker Rule, including the compliance and recordkeeping procedures, reflects<br />
the well established regulatory influence that banking entities face in a variety of other<br />
business operations, including lending, deposit products, information regarding depositors<br />
and borrowers and the ownership of real estate (for example, bank ownership of real estate is<br />
subject to specific limitation).<br />
The history of bank regulation in the U.S. dates back to 1838 and illustrates a<br />
pattern of intense involvement by bank regulators over banks with respect to a variety of<br />
issues. Some of the significant bank laws are:<br />
<br />
<br />
1838 - New York Free Banking Act, which permitted the organization of a<br />
state bank provided certain conditions were satisfied.<br />
1863-1864 - National Currency Act, which later was revised to the National<br />
Bank Act of 1864, which formalized the creation of national banks.<br />
21
1927 - McFadden Act of 1927, which prohibited interstate branching by<br />
national banks and permitted intrastate branching by a national bank to<br />
the same extent permitted under applicable state banking law.<br />
1932 - Federal Home Loan Bank Act, which enabled greater home<br />
ownership through the establishment of the Federal Home Loan Bank<br />
System, the Federal Home Loan Bank Board and twelve Federal Home Loan<br />
Banks.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
1933 - The “second” Glass-Steagall Act (formally named the Banking Act of<br />
1933), which formed the FDIC, and separated the investment banking and<br />
commercial banking industries.<br />
1935 - Banking Act of 1935, which permanently established the FDIC.<br />
1956 - Bank Holding Company Act, which permits banks to be owned by a<br />
regulated holding company.<br />
1968 - Truth in Lending Act, which is part of the Consumer Credit Protection<br />
Act and requires robust consumer disclosure standards.<br />
1970 - Bank Holding Company Act Amendments, which further regulate<br />
bank holding companies by better defining permitted banking activities<br />
and increasing the oversight by the Federal Reserve Board.<br />
1975 - Home Mortgage Disclosure Act, which requires financial institutions<br />
to maintain and disclose data bout home purchases, preapprovals and<br />
improvements.<br />
1977 - Community Reinvestment Act, which prohibits the discriminatory<br />
lending practice known as redlining.<br />
1978 - International Banking Act, which provides for regulation of non-U.S.<br />
banks by the Federal Reserve Board and applicable state authorities.<br />
1980 - Depository Institutions Deregulation and Monetary Control Act,<br />
which established reserve requirements for all banks and phased out the<br />
limitations on interest that may be paid on deposits (Regulation Q),<br />
permitted the issuance of bank credit cards and exempted mortgage loans<br />
from state usury laws.<br />
1991 - Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act, which<br />
increased the powers of the FDIC and gave the FDIC better access to<br />
liquidity through U.S. Treasury borrowings to replenish the Bank Insurance<br />
Fund and gave greater power to the FDIC to close a failing bank.<br />
1991 - Foreign Bank Supervision Enforcement Act, which established<br />
federal standards for non-U.S. banks operating in the U.S. and increased the<br />
supervisory authority of the Federal Reserve Board.<br />
22
1994 - Riegle-Neal Interstate Banking and Branching Efficiency Act, which<br />
permits interstate branching, reversed the limitation under the McFadden<br />
Act, and increased permitted interstate bank mergers.<br />
1999 - Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act, which effectively repealed the Glass-<br />
Steagall Act with respect to bank holding companies that qualify and elect<br />
to be a financial holding company.<br />
2001 - U.S.A. Patriot Act, which, together with several regulations<br />
promulgated by FinCEN (part of the U.S. Treasury Department), significantly<br />
increased the “know your customer” and customer due diligence<br />
requirements.<br />
2004 - Check Clearing for the 21 st Century Act, also known as Check 21,<br />
which significantly changed check processing and settlements.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
2006 - Financial Services Regulatory Relief Act, which was intended to<br />
reduce the regulatory burden to banks.<br />
2008 - The Housing and Economic Recovery Act of 2008 (or HERA), which<br />
addresses the subprime mortgage crisis by, among other provisions,<br />
authorizing the Federal Housing Administration to guarantee up to $300<br />
billion in new 30-year fixed rate mortgages for subprime borrowers if<br />
lenders write-down principal loan balances to 90 percent of current<br />
appraisal value and authorizes states to refinance subprime loans using<br />
mortgage revenue bonds. HERA also led to the government<br />
conservatorship of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac.<br />
2008 - Emergency Economic Stabilization Act of 2008, which establishes the<br />
$700 billion Troubled Assets Relief Program (TARP).<br />
2009 - Credit Card Act of 2009, which limits controls and limits increases on<br />
credit card interest rates.<br />
2009 - Fraud Enforcement and Recovery Act, which creates the Financial<br />
Crisis Inquiry Commission, an investigative body modeled after the<br />
Depression-era Pecora Commission, to among other matters, enhanced<br />
criminal enforcement of federal fraud laws, especially regarding financial<br />
institutions and mortgage fraud.<br />
2009 - Helping Families Save Their Homes Act, which amends the Hope for<br />
Homeowners Program, as well as provides additional provisions to help<br />
borrowers avoid foreclosure.<br />
2010 - Dodd-Frank Act.<br />
A core element of the Volcker Rule is the limitations of traditional areas of a<br />
bank’s operations to limit and mitigate specified industry risks. The Volcker Rule is one of<br />
numerous means by which federal and state bank regulators control the scope and risk of a<br />
23
ank’s business. The selected list of significant banking statutes noted above each provide<br />
federal authority over a specified aspect of a bank’s business. In addition to the banking<br />
statutes noted above, broad reaching limitations on a bank’s business are provided by<br />
numerous bank regulations promulgated by federal and state authorities and the bank<br />
supervision process through the uniform rating of banks under the CAMELS ratings system.<br />
CAMELS is one of the core processes by which a bank is rated for regulatory purposes. It is a<br />
bank’s composite rating (1 being the best and 5 representing regulatory concern) under the<br />
Uniform Financial Institutions Rating System (UFIRS) and integrates ratings from six<br />
component areas: <strong>Capital</strong> adequacy, Asset quality, Management, Earnings, Liquidity, and<br />
Sensitivity to market risk. Evaluations of the component areas take into consideration the<br />
institution’s size and sophistication, the nature and complexity of its activities, and its risk<br />
profile. A bank with a high CAMELS rating can be deemed to be a troubled financial<br />
institution resulting in limitations on its permitted banking activities, for example accepting<br />
brokered deposits.<br />
Some critics of the Volcker Rule have argued that it unnecessarily increases<br />
detailed recordkeeping, mandates certain business practices, prohibits other business<br />
practices, and increases a bank’s regulatory expense and burden which, together with lost<br />
proprietary profit opportunities, may significantly reduce a bank’s profits. An argument can<br />
be made, however, that the scope of the restrictions and entanglement in bank risk<br />
management required under the Volcker Rule is consistent with existing bank regulatory<br />
regime in a variety of other aspects of the business of a bank and other financial institutions.<br />
Since the 1819 U.S. Supreme Court decision in McCulloch v. Maryland, banks are, in many<br />
respects, effectively agents of the government that enjoy the protections and privileges set<br />
forth in their charters or bank licenses that are issued by the applicable regulator, in large<br />
part, in their discretion and the additional protections offered by the federal authority, such as<br />
the insurance by the FDIC. In exchange for a bank’s ability to accept retail deposits, its access<br />
to the discount window for advances from the Federal Reserve, the protections of the FDIC<br />
and the general protections and privileges set forth in a bank’s charter, a bank must accept,<br />
and comply with, the direct management and business control asserted upon a bank’s<br />
business by various Federal and state agencies and statutes, notwithstanding the significant<br />
costs and administrative burdens which may arise in connection with such compliance. Some<br />
financial institutions are apparently re-computing the cost / benefit analysis of maintaining a<br />
depositary institution and are reportedly considering selling or otherwise disposing their<br />
depository institution in order to continue their proprietary trading activities, as a result of the<br />
requirements of the Volcker Rule.<br />
III.<br />
The Volcker Rule<br />
The Proposed Rules may be compared to the Rubik’s Cube. The rules are a<br />
sophisticated and detailed matrix that rely on numerous defined terms. Like the Rubik’s<br />
Cube, each time that a condition for a defined term is satisfied, it leads to another turn of the<br />
puzzle. The analytic objective is to solve the puzzle to determine if a specified action is<br />
24
deemed to be prohibited proprietary trading or if the specified action is permitted and, if<br />
permitted, restricted or limited by capital or other specified requirements.<br />
One apparent reason for the delay in developing and adopting the final rule is<br />
that the Agencies face a daunting task to implement the seemingly straightforward objective<br />
of the Dodd-Frank Act. This is illustrated by the debate and difficulty in defining the core<br />
concept: proprietary trading, and the difficulty in defining the scope of the permitted<br />
activities such as market making, hedging or customer support. The Proposed Rules admit<br />
that “… the delineation of what constitutes a prohibited or permitted activity … often<br />
involves subtle distinctions that are difficult both to describe comprehensively within<br />
regulation and to evaluate in practice.” A bright-line objective standard was rejected by the<br />
Agencies in favor of a multi-faceted approach. The multi-faceted approach offers an adaptive<br />
approach to implement the Volcker Rule that provides an ability to fine tune the scope of the<br />
proprietary trading restriction and permitted “carve outs”. The Proposed Rules provide a<br />
framework that: (i) provides core elements of actions that would be deemed, and have<br />
traditionally been indicative of, proprietary trading, and guidelines to determine the extent of<br />
permitted or exempted activities; (ii) require a comprehensive and programmatic compliance<br />
regime which effectively requires a robust enterprise risk management system with respect to<br />
all trading operations, including permitted trading activities; and (iii) with respect to<br />
proprietary trading, requires certain banking entities to calculate and report meaningful<br />
quantitative data that will provide the Agencies with current market intelligence to identify<br />
any particular activity that warrants additional scrutiny to distinguish prohibited proprietary<br />
trading from otherwise permissible activities. The Proposed Rules attempt to strike the “…<br />
appropriate balance between accommodating prudent risk management and the continued<br />
provision of client-oriented financial services by banking entities while ensuring that such<br />
entities do not engage in prohibited proprietary trading or restricted covered fund activities<br />
or investments.”<br />
The fundamental objective of the Volcker Rule is to prohibit depositary<br />
institutions (generally, banks and their subsidiaries) and other entities that will be deemed a<br />
“covered banking entity” from engaging in proprietary trading, except as otherwise expressly<br />
permitted. The specific language of the Proposed Rules is: “(a) Prohibition. Except as<br />
otherwise provided in this subpart, a covered banking entity may not engage in proprietary<br />
trading.” The analytic and substantive guidance by the Agencies (and the current debate over<br />
the scope of the Volcker Rule) is provided by certain key defined terms.<br />
Covered Banking Entity<br />
The first step of the analysis is to determine if the activity is by a “covered<br />
banking entity”. If the institution is a covered banking entity, then it is subject to the<br />
proprietary trading prohibition. The Proposed Rules parallel the statutory language with one<br />
interesting difference. The statute uses the phrase banking entity (which is broadly defined,<br />
as discussed above). The Proposed Rules change the scope (and the type of entity subject to<br />
the restrictions) to “covered banking entity” and do not define this phrase. This definition is<br />
25
eserved by the Agencies to their respective specific regulatory action that will be provided at<br />
a later date.<br />
One opportunity to tailor the scope of the Volcker Rule is to permit certain<br />
affiliates of a depository institution to maintain proprietary trading activities that are<br />
restricted by capital and position limits. It is clear that to accurately implement the Volcker<br />
Rule, a covered banking entity must include the entities that could receive “taxpayer bailouts”<br />
through FDIC insurance or similar programs and include the bank holding companies and<br />
other affiliates of the bank to the extent that their capital could be subject to proprietary<br />
trading losses in excess of certain limits. Bank holding companies are traditionally viewed as<br />
organizations that are able to support the depository institutions with additional capital, even<br />
if not subject to a firm commitment or obligation. If the liabilities of bank holding company<br />
affiliates, excluding the bank and its subsidiaries, which are given any value on the bank’s<br />
balance sheet were limited, for example by the limited liability of a corporate structure, then<br />
the fundamental purpose of the Volcker Rule that the taxpayers are not required to bailout<br />
proprietary trading firms would still be achieved. On the other hand, Agencies may provide<br />
final rules that continue the broad reach of the statutory language which would simply define<br />
a covered banking entity as the type of affiliates that are within the scope of the specific<br />
regulatory Agency, such as a broker dealer (SEC) or futures commission merchant (CFTC).<br />
The Dodd-Frank Act permits “specified other nonbank financial institutions” to<br />
engage in proprietary trading and have investments in and other relationships with hedge<br />
funds and private equity funds, subject to additional capital charges, quantitative limits, or<br />
other restrictions. These entities will most likely be the hedge funds and other entities that<br />
will be subject to oversight because of their potential systemic risk to the U.S. financial<br />
system. The final rules promulgated by the Agencies will need to provide a meaningful<br />
further gloss on the restrictions. In addition, further Congressional action could effectively<br />
redefine “banking entities” to exclude certain “specified other nonbank financial institutions”.<br />
Given the current debate over the scope of the Volcker Rule, it is difficult to accurately assess<br />
the likelihood of such additional action.<br />
Proprietary Trading<br />
The next turn of the Rubik’s Cube is to determine if the activity by a covered<br />
banking entity constitutes proprietary trading. Proprietary trading is defined simply as:<br />
engaging as principal for the trading account of the covered banking<br />
entity in any purchase or sale of one or more covered financial<br />
positions. Proprietary trading does not include acting solely as agent,<br />
broker, or custodian for an unaffiliated third party. (emphasis added)<br />
This definition requires several more turns of our Rubik’s Cube, specifically,<br />
defining the terms “trading account” and “covered financial position”.<br />
26
Trading Account<br />
In defining “trading account”, the Agencies attempted to delineate the type of<br />
activities that are customarily part of the proprietary trading operations. A trading account<br />
has purchases, sales and other transactions or investments for short-term gains or losses. The<br />
Proposed Rules did not elect to use generally accepted accounting principles as the primary<br />
definitional source. Rather the Proposed Rules borrow a variety of concepts and definitions<br />
currently used in federal banking, securities and commodities regulations. There are certain<br />
objective standards provided by the Proposed Rules, such as trading by dealers in their<br />
capacity as a dealer and positions, other than specified positions, under the Market Risk<br />
<strong>Capital</strong> Rules. The Proposed Rules mostly define trading account and other key terms with<br />
subjective standards, which is more akin to providing guidance and not specific instructions.<br />
Subject to specified exceptions, a trading account includes an account in which positions are<br />
purchased and sold on a short-term basis, where the institution gains from short-term price<br />
movements, realizes short-term arbitrage profits, or hedges another trading account position.<br />
The lack of clear and objective standards to define “short-term” will make it<br />
more difficult to determine if an account is a trading account. One benefit of this multifaceted<br />
and subjective approach is that objective standards would enable an institution to<br />
evade the fundamental purpose of the statutory restriction while complying with the literal<br />
text of the rule. In addition, it is unlikely that any objective standard would be able to foresee<br />
and be adoptive to future market trading strategies and financial instruments that present a<br />
similar risk profile. If an objective set of rules were promulgated by the Agencies, there would<br />
likely be the need to update the rules to capture additional financial instruments and<br />
transaction structures. This would likely result in the regulatory game of “catch-up” and give<br />
pause to even the most conservative banker, as permitted positions, strategies and structures<br />
could be recharacterized as not permitted leaving bankers in the untenable position of<br />
needing to liquidate a position that they thought, in good faith, complied with the Volcker<br />
Rule when the position or trade was initiated. As such, either approach – clear, specific and<br />
objective standards or subjective standards subject to later regulatory amplification through<br />
no-action rulings or similar opinions, subject financial institutions to a degree of uncertainty<br />
in these particular Dodd-Frank waters.<br />
The Agencies note that short-term positions are generally indicative of<br />
behavior that reflects proprietary trading. This behavior is often the quick reaction to market<br />
inefficiencies or underlying value expectations of a particular security or trading position by<br />
portfolio managers or people on the “trading desk” related to a trading strategy is indicative<br />
of proprietary trading. To assist in the determination of short-term positions, the Proposed<br />
Rules provide a 60-day rebuttable presumption. Subject to specified exceptions, positions<br />
that are held for 60 days or less will be presumed to be “short-term” positions. The financial<br />
institution has the opportunity to rebut this presumption “… based on all the facts and<br />
circumstances”. It is important to note that this rebuttable presumption is not a safe-harbor<br />
for the financial position. Positions that are held longer than 60 days may still be classified by<br />
the regulators as “short-term” positions. Therefore, banking entities should carefully<br />
27
document the underlying reasons for exiting or closing a position that was initiated as part of<br />
a long-term investment strategy.<br />
The Proposed Rules provide exemptions from the trading account definition by<br />
describing certain positions that will not be deemed to make an account a trading account.<br />
These are:<br />
<br />
<br />
positions under bona fide repurchase and reverse-repurchase agreements;<br />
positions under bona fide stock loan and stock borrow agreements;<br />
positions taken by the institution that is a clearing organization in<br />
connection with its obligations to clear derivatives or securities; and<br />
the less objective exemption, positions held for bona fide liquidity<br />
management.<br />
The liquidity management exemption is subject to additional qualifications<br />
which are considered by the Agencies to be indicative of positions that are purchased and<br />
sold to manage the liquidity position of the financial institution and in which the trading<br />
profits or losses are incidental to this primary objective. To qualify for this exemption, the<br />
positions must have been purchased and sold pursuant to a written and authorized liquidity<br />
management plan with specified minimum attributes, including, approval of the type of<br />
circumstances including market conditions in which a position may be traded, that the<br />
position is traded “principally” for managing the institution’s liquidity position and not for<br />
short-term trading profits or hedging, that the type of the security is highly liquid and that the<br />
positions be “consistent” with the “near-term” funding needs of the institution, including the<br />
expected changes from estimated operations. As such, a covered banking entity may<br />
purchase and sell highly liquid securities that are traded in an active and liquid market and<br />
have reasonably expected price variations.<br />
Covered Financial Positions<br />
Another key term used in the definition of proprietary trading is “covered<br />
financial positions”. This term is broadly defined to include a wide array of securities,<br />
derivatives, futures and other financial products. Significantly, the following trading<br />
positions are exempted: loans, commodities and foreign exchange or currency trading. The<br />
need to exempt loans is self-evident. However, the necessary broad scope of the exception<br />
for loans will make it more difficult to eliminate proprietary trading risk. A loan is defined as<br />
“any loan, lease, extension of credit, or secured or unsecured receivable.” (emphasis added)<br />
The phrase “extension of credit” is a term of art under the federal banking regulations that is<br />
broadly defined. The Proposed Rules do not address the tension that will likely develop<br />
between the more sophisticated loan (extension of credit) transactions and the need to<br />
eliminate or substantially mitigate trading risks as well as the extent of the ancillary<br />
transactions, if any, that may be included in this exemption. For example, transactions that<br />
guaranty the performance of others or the ability of a special purpose entity used in CDO<br />
28
transactions to make payments to investors are extensions of credit. In addition, excluding<br />
“spot” or physical trading in commodities and currencies has drawn criticism from some<br />
commentators that this provides a similar and significant “loophole” for banking institutions<br />
as an FX trading desk exposes a financial institution to significant proprietary trading risks.<br />
The issuance and trading (through syndication and participation and other structures) of<br />
guarantees or credit support products may also subject an entity to significant risk, as<br />
evidenced by recent events.<br />
Permitted Positions<br />
The next step of the analysis is to determine if a covered financial position that<br />
is in a trading account is otherwise exempt from the proprietary trading restrictions of the<br />
Volcker Rule. Each of these exemptions requires an additional turn of our Rubik’s Cube.<br />
These exemptions are:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Underwriting activities<br />
Market making-related activities;<br />
Risk-mitigating hedging activity;<br />
Trading in certain government obligations;<br />
Trading on behalf of customers;<br />
Investments in Small Business Investment Companies (“SBICs”) and public<br />
interest investments;<br />
Trading for the general account of insurance companies;<br />
Organizing and offering a covered fund (including limited investments in<br />
such funds); and<br />
Foreign trading by non-U.S. banking entities and foreign covered fund<br />
activities by non-U.S. banking entities.<br />
Many commentators have noted that scope of underwriting activities, risk<br />
mitigating hedging activities and customer support trading activities are overbroad and<br />
continue to expose banking institutions to significant market risk from proprietary trading<br />
operations.<br />
1. Underwriting.<br />
Underwriting activities are permitted by covered banking entities to the extent<br />
that they are acting in their capacity as an underwriter or dealer solely with respect to the<br />
distribution of securities provided that the institution complies with a specified internal<br />
control and compliance program, including recordkeeping requirements and the following<br />
other conditions:<br />
29
The position is “designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near-term<br />
demands of clients, customers, or counterparties” of the banking entity.<br />
This provision restates the statutory language and does not give any<br />
needed meaningful gloss to the elements to determine the “near term<br />
demands”. The Agencies’ request for comments include requests for<br />
additional criteria or methods that an institution may use to accurately<br />
predict the “near term demands” so that securities positions undertaken to<br />
meet bona fide underwriting obligations are appropriately distinguished<br />
from speculative positions. The final rules may provide additional<br />
guidance. At a minimum, financial institutions should keep detailed<br />
records of the expected demand of the underwriting “book” including the<br />
reason and ability to exit any additional securities purchased by exercise of<br />
the typical overallotment option or “shoe”.<br />
Consistent with customary operations, the primary revenue source must be<br />
fees, commissions, underwriting spreads or other income, and not gains<br />
from the security position, including any hedging positions. That is, profits<br />
or losses resulting from changes in the market value, including with respect<br />
to exercise of the overallotment option or “shoe” would be indicative of<br />
speculative proprietary trading and not prudent underwritten offerings<br />
with a matched “book”.<br />
The institution’s compensation arrangements for individuals engaged in<br />
the underwriting activities must be designed to not encourage proprietary<br />
risk-taking, such as bonus arrangements correlated to market appreciation.<br />
The compensation program condition is a recurring obligation for activities<br />
to be exempt from the proprietary trading prohibition and the focus of<br />
other parts of the Dodd-Frank Act.<br />
The Proposed Rules provide examples of activities that would be performed by<br />
a financial institution that are indicative of the institution acting as a bona fide underwriter<br />
and admit that the following examples may not be sufficiently clear or that each would<br />
necessarily be performed by an institution for it to be acting as an underwriter:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Assisting an issuer in capital raising;<br />
Performing due diligence;<br />
Advising the issuer on market conditions and assisting in the preparation of<br />
a registration statement or other offering documents;<br />
Purchasing securities from an issuer, a selling security holder, or an<br />
underwriter for resale to the public;<br />
Participating in or organizing a syndicate of investment banks;<br />
Marketing securities; and<br />
30
Transacting to provide a post-issuance secondary market and to facilitate<br />
price discovery.<br />
The examples of bona fide underwriting activities are provided as guidance<br />
and are not required in all situations. For example, a member of an underwriting syndicate<br />
may take a position as part of its obligations to the syndicate but may not be actively involved<br />
in each aspect of the underwritten offering.<br />
2. Market Making Activities.<br />
There are several subjective conditions required for a financial institution to<br />
have short term investments qualify for the market making exemption. Of the exempted<br />
trading activities, the market making exemption may be one of the more difficult exemptions<br />
to enforce, as the primary goal, indeed obligation, of the financial institution in its marketmaking<br />
activities is to assume and manage proprietary trading risk. The fundamental<br />
objective of the provisions, or their common theme, is the management and mitigation of<br />
proprietary risk by requiring that the positions are limited to the amount necessary for the<br />
expected demands of the market. The Proposed Rules admit the inherent limitations in<br />
attempting to strike this balance.<br />
Market making-related activities, like prohibited proprietary trading,<br />
sometimes require the taking of positions as principal, and the<br />
amount of principal risk that must be assumed by a market maker<br />
varies considerably by asset class and differing market conditions. It<br />
may be difficult to distinguish principal positions that appropriately<br />
support market making-related activities from positions taken for shortterm,<br />
speculative purposes. In particular, it may be difficult to<br />
determine whether principal risk has been retained because (i) the<br />
retention of such risk is necessary to provide intermediation and<br />
liquidity services for a relevant financial instrument or (ii) the<br />
position is part of a speculative trading strategy designed to realize<br />
profits from price movements in retained principal risk. (emphasis<br />
added)<br />
Accordingly, the Agencies have adopted a multi-faceted approach that<br />
provides guidance as to the core elements of bona fide market making operations. There are<br />
seven specified criteria:<br />
(i) Risk compliance program. The market making activities must comply<br />
with the institution’s comprehensive compliance program that monitors and controls the<br />
market making activities. Institutions should remember that the applicable Agency will<br />
monitor adherence with their compliance program and assess whether it sufficiently<br />
appreciates and controls the market and operational risk. Institutions should take care in<br />
developing the scope of the compliance program and include independent testing and reevaluation<br />
of effectiveness.<br />
31
(ii) Market Making Operations. The activities must reflect bona fide<br />
customary market making operations, such as:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Making continuous, two sided quotes and holding oneself out as willing to<br />
buy and sell on a continuous basis;<br />
A pattern of trading that includes both purchases and sales in roughly<br />
comparable amounts to provide liquidity, including taking positions that<br />
anticipate and are designed to fill market / customer demands for the<br />
position;<br />
Making continuous quotations that are at or near the market on both sides;<br />
and<br />
Providing widely accessible and broadly disseminated quotes.<br />
In less liquid markets, the criteria of the institution holding itself out as a market<br />
maker and regular transactions that are consistent with customer liquidity and investment<br />
needs will be of greater focus.<br />
(iii) Customer Demand. The inventory positions by a financial institution<br />
should be limited to the amount necessary to fill the “reasonably expected near-term<br />
demands” of the institution as the maker of the specified security or position. This condition<br />
is consistent with the existing requirements under the Bank Holding Company Act and is<br />
intended to prevent a trading desk that is relying on the market making exemption from<br />
taking a speculative proprietary position unrelated to customer needs as part of its purported<br />
market making-related activities. In determining the market demands, the institution should<br />
consider more than “simple” expected price volatility and focus on “… the unique customer<br />
base of the banking entity’s specific market-making business lines and the near-term<br />
demands of those customers based on particular factors beyond a general expectation of<br />
price appreciation.”<br />
(iv) Registration Standards. The banking entity must comply with all<br />
applicable securities registration requirements. To the extent applicable, the institution’s<br />
market making activities must be through a registered dealer, such as a dealer or municipal<br />
securities dealer under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 or swaps dealer under the<br />
Commodity Exchange Act. If the market making activities are not subject to these<br />
registration requirements, such as for non-U.S. operations, the operations must be subject to<br />
the applicable local regulatory regime. This requirement effectively delegates certain<br />
mitigation of proprietary trading risk to the specific securities and commodities regulations,<br />
for example net capital requirements including “haircuts” and margin deposits.<br />
(v) Revenue Source. The primary source of revenue from the operations<br />
should be fees, commissions, and bid/ask spreads. The Proposed Rules, including Appendix<br />
B, provide considerable attention to this element as a key distinction between bona fide<br />
market making activities and prohibited proprietary trading. One difficulty that may be<br />
32
presented is that the trading profit for a market maker will be consistent with the bid/ask by<br />
that institution. It may be difficult to demonstrate compliance with this criterion in illiquid<br />
markets, where the position is held for some length of time in order to meet anticipated<br />
market demand.<br />
(vi) Compensation Program. Another reflection of this recurring theme is<br />
that the institution’s compensation program, particularly for trading desk personnel, must not<br />
reward market speculation or trading profit. The Proposed Rules note that the compensation<br />
program may “appropriately take into account” the desk’s trading profits for personnel that<br />
are managing the principal risk inherent in the market making operations. The primary<br />
incentive compensation for personnel must, however, “reward customer revenues and<br />
effective customer service.” In this regard, the institution’s compensation program should be<br />
well documented and establish market oriented goals such as trades from existing clients,<br />
establishing new client relationships, low number of customer complaints and disputed<br />
trades and other indicia of exemplary customer service.<br />
(vii) Other Criteria Set Forth in Appendix B. The Agencies provide in<br />
Appendix B to the Proposed Rules a discussion of the various factors and customary attributes<br />
of market making operations. The market making operations of the institution must be<br />
consistent with these additional subjective criteria that, effectively, amplify the other factors.<br />
3. Risk-mitigating hedging activities.<br />
Another controversial area of the Proposed Rules is the exemption provided for<br />
hedging activities. At first glance, the ability of a covered banking entity to reduce its<br />
proprietary risk seems to further to goals of the Dodd-Frank Act. Many commentators,<br />
however, have expressed concern that activities that purport to hedge risk will actually hide<br />
speculative trading operations. The Proposed Rules provide specific conditions for a trade to<br />
be deemed a hedge. These conditions are designed to substantially reduce the risk of<br />
disguised speculative activities that are mischaracterized as a hedge.<br />
(i) Risk compliance program. First, reflecting the approach for permitted<br />
market making activities, hedge transactions must comply with an effective written internal<br />
compliance program that provides reasonable assurance that positions in fact hedge and<br />
mitigate existing proprietary risk. The Proposed Rules (Subpart D) provide a detailed<br />
summary of an effective compliance program and these procedures are consistent with<br />
robust enterprise risk management policies, which banks are obligated to have under other<br />
applicable regulations. The compliance program must specify the positions and trading<br />
strategies and limits for the hedging activities and include effective monitoring and<br />
independent testing. The hedging must be consistent with prudent and stated risk<br />
management policies.<br />
(ii) Mitigate specific risk. The hedging activities must “… mitigate one or<br />
more specific risks, including market risk, counterparty or other credit risk, currency or foreign<br />
33
exchange risk, interest rate risk, basis risk, or similar risks, arising in connection with …” the<br />
institution’s business. Further, the hedging activity must be “reasonably correlated” to these<br />
underlying business risks and positions and not increase the liquidity risk of the institution<br />
(that is cash flows of the hedge transaction should not provide a deficit to the cash flows of<br />
the underlying trade or risk).<br />
(iii) No significant exposures. Measured at the inception of the hedge<br />
transaction, the hedge cannot provide “significant exposures” to the then existing underlying<br />
business risks and positions of the financial institution and its affiliates.<br />
(iv) Oversight. The hedging operations must be under continuous and<br />
effective monitoring and management oversight and be subject to independent review and<br />
examination that detects compliance with the applicable procedures and identifies any<br />
material weaknesses.<br />
(v) Compensation Program. Another instance of this recurring theme is<br />
that the compensation program for those associated with the hedging activities cannot<br />
incentivize speculative risks.<br />
(vi) Recordkeeping. Another significant condition is that the institution<br />
must maintain detailed documentation, including documentation that relates to the risk that<br />
is mitigated by the hedge, the manner in which the hedge mitigates the risk and the<br />
operational personnel that that approved the analysis and the trade.<br />
4. Trading in certain government obligations.<br />
The Proposed Rules provide specific covered financial positions that are<br />
exempt from the proprietary trading prohibition. These are:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
U.S. government and agency obligations.<br />
An obligation, participation, or other instrument of or issued by the<br />
Government National Mortgage Association, the Federal National<br />
Mortgage Association, the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation, a<br />
Federal Home Loan Bank, the Federal Agricultural Mortgage Corporation or<br />
a Farm Credit System.<br />
Obligation of any State or political subdivision.<br />
Some commentators have noted that the list of permitted investments should<br />
include state agency bonds and obligations. It is interesting to note that some state agencies<br />
have a credit rating that is superior to that of the state (or even the U.S.) bond obligations.<br />
Other commentators have noted that non-U.S. government obligations should be permitted<br />
while others have advocated that the list of permitted debt positions should not be expanded<br />
to include non-U.S. obligations and note the recent failure of a large financial institution<br />
because of its “bets” on non-U.S. sovereign debt to support their position. Another reason<br />
34
that the Agencies may elect to not expand the list of the permitted debt obligations, is that<br />
there is considerable political appeal to continue to support active and liquid markets trading<br />
T-Bills, T-Bonds and other permitted debt obligations.<br />
5. Trading on behalf of customers. Riskless principal and other customer<br />
trades are exempt from the proprietary trading prohibition. This is consistent with existing<br />
bank regulations. Even under the Glass-Steagall Act, banks were permitted to act as brokers<br />
and agents. This exemption includes trades conducted by institutions in their capacity as an<br />
investment adviser, commodities trading adviser, trustee or similar capacity solely for the<br />
benefit of customers. There are similar conditions for trading by insurance companies for the<br />
separate accounts of the policy holder.<br />
6. Investments in Small Business Investment Companies (“SBICs”) and public<br />
interest investments. The Proposed Rules exempt these investments as well as a covered<br />
banking entity sponsoring, owning or retaining an interest in a covered fund that is an SBIC or<br />
such other entity. The Agencies noted that these investment activities are consistent with<br />
safe and sound business practices and permit the covered banking entity to provide valuable<br />
funding and assistance to small businesses and low-and moderate-income communities, an<br />
important obligation of banks under the Community Reinvestment Act.<br />
7. Trading for the general account of insurance companies. Regulated<br />
insurance companies may generally engage in proprietary trading for their own account. To<br />
restrict such trading would significantly disrupt the basic business model of the insurance<br />
industry. The Proposed Rules, accordingly, focus on the following objective standards: the<br />
entity or its affiliate is an insurance company licensed under applicable state law (or non-U.S.<br />
insurance regulatory regime) and the trading is solely for the general account of the<br />
insurance company in compliance with applicable laws. The Proposed Rules add a safety<br />
provision that the appropriate federal agencies will review the applicable state and non-U.S.<br />
laws and, upon notice, may disallow the proprietary trading activities to the extent that state<br />
or non-U.S. law permits trading and investments by the insurance company or its affiliates are<br />
“… insufficient to protect the safety and soundness of the banking entity or of the financial<br />
stability of the United States.” It should be noted that this is the only area of permitted<br />
activities where the Agencies have and will continue to place considerable reliance on the<br />
regulatory oversight by others, specifically each of the state insurance commissioners or<br />
similar authority. There is support for this reliance as even one of the most significant failures<br />
of an insurance holding company still resulted in the specific insurance companies with<br />
sufficient capital and excess to continue to actively engage in the insurance business.<br />
8. Organizing and offering a covered fund (including limited investments in<br />
such funds). The Proposed Rules follow the limited statutory exemption for organizing and<br />
offering, or investing in, a covered fund. The limited exemption permits the institution to<br />
continue to organize and offer investments in hedge funds and private equity funds if:<br />
35
the financial institution provides bona fide trust, fiduciary, or investment<br />
advisory services;<br />
the activities are related to, and are provided in connection with, bona fide<br />
trust, fiduciary, or investment advisory services and only to persons that are<br />
the institution’s customers;<br />
the investment interest is limited to the de minimis level, which generally<br />
limits the investment to the amount to seed the organization and operating<br />
costs of the fund and expenses incurred for the fund to offer and attract<br />
investments from unaffiliated investors, and which requires the institution<br />
to have its interest in the fund reduced within one year (subject to<br />
extension by the Federal Reserve Board for up to 2 additional years) to not<br />
more than 3% of the total ownership interests in the fund and requires that<br />
the institution’s investment in the fund is not more than 3% of the Tier 1<br />
capital of the banking entity (generally, the amount under generally<br />
accepted accounting principles equal to the par value and additional paid<br />
in capital for the common stock and perpetual preferred stock and net<br />
earnings);<br />
the institution does not engage in affiliated transactions or “covered”<br />
transactions restricted by banks with their affiliates, other than prime<br />
brokerage services if other specified conditions are satisfied;<br />
the institution does not have direct or contingent liabilities regarding the<br />
fund, its obligations or performance, unless otherwise expressly permitted;<br />
the institution is separate from the fund in other specified ways, including<br />
the marketing of the fund (including that the fund cannot trade on the<br />
bank’s name);<br />
no director or employee of the institution has an ownership interest in the<br />
fund, except as permitted for those directors or employees who are directly<br />
engaged in providing investment advisory or other services to the hedge<br />
fund or private equity fund; and<br />
the institution complies with specified disclosure obligations, including that<br />
the bank does not have any obligation for any losses in the hedge fund or<br />
private equity fund.<br />
This area of the Volcker Rule is one of the more significant provisions. It<br />
mandates that covered banking institutions divest or “kick out” their capitive or sponsored<br />
hedge funds and private equity funds prior to the expiration of the conformance period,<br />
which is subject to extension in the discretion of the Federal Reserve Board on a per fund<br />
basis. The ramification of this restriction, has already been evident. One market report noted<br />
that more hedge funds were formed during the first quarter of <strong>2012</strong> than any other quarter as<br />
banks wind down or divest their fund operations. The full effect of the kick out provision to<br />
banks will likely not be seen for some time. In addition to profits, large banks were able to<br />
36
supplement their traditional commercial bank product offerings with their affiliated funds.<br />
Some commentators have expressed concern that limiting the product offerings will impede<br />
a bank’s ability to assist large industrial companies through all parts of their capital structure<br />
and may disadvantage U.S. banks to their non-U.S. counter parts. The counter argument is<br />
that under Glass-Steagall Act, prior to the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act, U.S. banks were able to<br />
grow significantly and appropriately support and finance the U.S. and other economies.<br />
Requiring the divestiture and separation of banks from hedge funds and<br />
private equity funds has been criticized by many supporting the limitation of the Volcker Rule.<br />
It is interesting to note a certain disconnect in the banking regulations. The loan attribution<br />
rules for commercial banks which are designed to limit the risks of loans and other extensions<br />
of credit, subject to certain exceptions, do not attribute the credit risk extended to a limited<br />
liability company or partnership to the managing member if the liability is limited under<br />
applicable law. The Volcker Rule would, by contrast, conclude the risk of the fund poses risk<br />
(and is attributed to) the banking entity.<br />
The Proposed Rules and the statute broadly define the terms hedge fund and<br />
private equity fund. Similar to other parts of the Dodd-Frank Act, these terms (referred to<br />
under the Proposed Rules as covered funds) include any entity that would be an investment<br />
company under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, but for the exemptions<br />
under sections 3(c)(1) (100 investor rule) or 3(c)(7) (institutional investor rule). In addition, the<br />
Proposed Rules include “or such similar funds as the Agencies may by rule determine.” The<br />
Proposed Rules include as “similar funds” commodity pools and non-U.S. entities that are<br />
substantively equivalent. This broad definition, subject to the regulatory discretion through<br />
the language “similar fund,” excludes may result in private equity funds that invest in and<br />
control portfolio companies to not qualify as an investment company. As such, the<br />
exemptions under 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) are not relevant. The Investment Company Act of 1940, as<br />
amended, provides that an investment company must have a threshold percentage of<br />
“investment securities”, which, generally, are passive investments. A private equity fund with<br />
portfolio investments that do not qualify as investment securities is more likely to be<br />
excluded from the statutory definition.<br />
9. Foreign trading by non-U.S. banking entities; and Foreign covered fund<br />
activities by non-U.S. banking entities. This exemption reflects the inherent limitations of the<br />
extraterritorial application of U.S. law. Trading activity by non-U.S. departments that are<br />
entirely effected outside the U.S. with no U.S. person being part of the transactions, including<br />
any person that is physically located in the U.S. that is making the trade for a non-U.S. entity,<br />
will be exempt. The regulations specify in greater detail that any contact of any participant in<br />
the trade with the U.S. would permit the application of Volcker Rule to the institution.<br />
10. Catch All Provision. Consistent with the underlying mission of federal<br />
banking regulations, the Proposed Rules provide that the exempted or permitted proprietary<br />
trading transactions will nevertheless be disallowed if the transaction would:<br />
37
involve or result in a material conflict of interest between the covered<br />
banking entity and its clients, customers, or counterparties;<br />
result, directly or indirectly, in a material exposure by the institution to a<br />
high-risk asset or a high-risk trading strategy; or<br />
pose a threat to the safety and soundness of the covered banking entity or<br />
to the financial stability of the United States.<br />
This set of safety or catch-all provisions reflect the basic bank regulator’s tool<br />
kit in overseeing the operations of banks and bank holding companies. The core purpose of<br />
much of the comprehensive bank regulatory regime is the promotion of “safety and<br />
soundness” of the banking entities. Indeed, the Volcker Rule is part of the regulatory regime<br />
intended to promote the safety and soundness of banks by protecting them from the<br />
perceived systemic and unnecessary risk of proprietary trading.<br />
Recordkeeping Requirements<br />
The Proposed Rules provide detailed recordkeeping and reporting obligations<br />
for covered banking entities. The detailed requirements are found in Appendix A to the<br />
Proposed Rules. These obligations are stratified in three tiers. Covered banking entities with<br />
aggregate trading assets of less than $1 billion measured as of the last day of each of the four<br />
prior calendar quarters, will not be subject to these enhanced reporting obligations. The<br />
second tier is for covered banking entities with trading assets under $5 billion and the third is<br />
for those larger banking institutions that exceed such amount. The enhanced recordkeeping<br />
and reporting obligations provide for a wide array of quantitative measurements of the<br />
covered trading activities of banking entities. The records must be maintained for a period of<br />
at least 5 years.<br />
The enhanced reporting will be used by the Agencies in their continuing<br />
mission to evaluate the market conditions, measure systemic and banking institutional risks<br />
and to update and enhance the regulations, as needed. Specifically, the Agencies note that<br />
the enhanced recordkeeping and reporting will:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
provide a better understanding and better process to evaluate the scope,<br />
type, and profile of the covered banking entity’s trading activities;<br />
assist the monitoring of the covered banking entity’s trading activities;<br />
identify trading activities that warrant further review or examination by the<br />
covered banking entity to verify compliance with the proprietary trading<br />
restrictions; and<br />
assist in evaluating whether the trading activities of trading units comply<br />
with the Volcker Rule requirements.<br />
IV.<br />
Nonbank Financial Institutions<br />
38
The Volcker Rule permits nonbank financial institutions to engage in<br />
proprietary trading subject to additional capital and other limitations. The Agencies have<br />
deferred specifying these capital and other limitations as well as specifying the type of<br />
entities that will be permitted to engage in proprietary trading. Quantifying the proprietary<br />
trading restrictions will likely affect the ability of hedge fund trading operations. While<br />
restricting such proprietary trading desk operations will likely reduce the systemic market risk,<br />
it will also likely reduce the market liquidity. The Agencies will need to strike the appropriate<br />
balance.<br />
V. The Future of the Volcker Rule<br />
It is difficult, if not impossible, to predict the future scope of the Volcker Rule. It<br />
is reasonable to expect that the basic premise of the Volcker Rule will continue in some form.<br />
Even if Congress overturns the Volcker Rule, the current bank regulatory regime may be<br />
leveraged to achieve many of the Volcker Rule goals. For example, the risk of proprietary<br />
trading positions could be more specifically assessed and banks could be required to lower<br />
their Tier 1 capital by the updated risk assessment amount. The CAMELS rating system could<br />
also be used to encourage or require banks to limit, disband or divest their proprietary<br />
trading operations. Effectively, every bank has a “partner” who is the government and the<br />
“partner” desires less risk undertaken by its commercial banks.<br />
Bank regulators have long had the ability through a variety of methods to<br />
apply their discretion to mandate a stable commercial banking industry that benefits the U.S.<br />
economy. The regulators’ tool kit has been enhanced with the powers and the mandate of<br />
the Volcker Rule. Despite the many criticisms of the broad reach and potential adverse effects<br />
of the statutory language and the Proposed Rules, it is likely that there will continue to be<br />
some form of significant limitations on proprietary trading.<br />
The question is what other types of commercial banking operations will be<br />
viewed by the bank regulators as exposing commercial banks and their affiliates to risk that<br />
must be limited for the protection of the U.S. financial system. The Basle Accords have been<br />
fine-tuning (some may say, overhauling) the capital levels required for banks, a significant risk<br />
mitigating technique. The process of the government attempting to strike the perfect<br />
balance of risk mitigation and pursuit of profit is dynamic and has been continuing for well<br />
over a century. The regulators have an inherent dilemma that is more difficult to solve than<br />
the Rubik’s Cube. On one hand, the economy is well served by offering every person the<br />
ability to maintain their money in a financial institution with the guaranteed return of every<br />
cent and a little bit more. On the other, the regulated financial institutions need to deploy<br />
these funds in prudent activities that generate sufficient profit to fund the operating costs<br />
and continue to attract capital and market support. Solving this dilemma is an ongoing and<br />
improving process that considers numerous factors. One of these factors is the level of trust<br />
that senior executives of bank entities will prudently control risk and pursue profit. A former<br />
Chair of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System admitted that he relied too<br />
much on this basic market discipline to achieve the correct balance. In many ways the<br />
39
Volcker Rule reflects the inverse relationship between confidence and reliance on market<br />
discipline and the scope of regulations that limit or bracket operations permitted by bank<br />
entities. The regulatory process is continuously evolving. The limits on the operations of<br />
banking entities, such as the Volcker Rule, will continue to reflect this process. The next step,<br />
as recently noted by a senior official of the U.S. Treasury Department, may be the attempt to<br />
“simplify” the Volcker Rule to achieve “smart rules that are responsive to the unique needs of<br />
our financial system and promote economic growth”.<br />
40
HERRICK, FEINSTEIN LLP’s<br />
SIXTH ANNUAL CAPITAL MARKETS SYMPOSIUM<br />
OCTOBER 2, <strong>2012</strong><br />
THE JOBS ACT<br />
BY STEPHEN E. FOX, MONICA REYES-GRAJALES and LILIANA CHANG
On April 5, <strong>2012</strong>, President Barack Obama signed into law the “Jumpstart Our Business<br />
Startups Act,” also known as the “JOBS Act.” The JOBS Act consists of seven unrelated titles,<br />
each of which are ostensibly designed to aid in raising capital, ease the regulatory burdens of<br />
smaller companies and spur an increase in the number of initial public offerings in the United<br />
States - which has seen a dramatic decline in the last decade - all of which would presumably<br />
culminate in job growth and economic growth in the United States. It remains to be seen if<br />
the JOBS Act can deliver as promised, while still protecting investors. While the bills that<br />
ultimately were signed into law as the JOBS Act were the product of bipartisan support in<br />
both Houses of Congress and were also supported by President Obama, there are many vocal<br />
opponents to the JOBS Act, including ranking members of Congress and former and current<br />
members of the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”). Opponents are<br />
concerned about the effect on investor protection due to the loosening of some longstanding<br />
rules specifically designed to safeguard investors, including the now-overturned<br />
ban on general solicitations and general advertising under Rule 506 of Regulation D among<br />
others, all of which will be discussed below.<br />
IPO ON-RAMP: REOPENING AMERICAN CAPITAL MARKETS TO EMERGING GROWTH<br />
COMPANIES<br />
Title I of the JOBS Act is entitled “Reopening American <strong>Capital</strong> <strong>Markets</strong> to Emerging<br />
Growth Companies” but is known by the more catchy “IPO On-Ramp.” The IPO On-Ramp is<br />
designed to encourage companies to go public by (a) loosening some restrictions for<br />
companies going through the IPO process and (b) creating a phase-in period for other<br />
obligations normally affecting public companies, providing some time for newly public<br />
companies to grow large enough to afford the regulatory costs associated with being a public<br />
company.<br />
Several members of Congress and commentators have expressed concerns that the<br />
provisions of the IPO On-Ramp (a) weaken investor protections by limiting disclosures that<br />
must be made by emerging growth companies and the application of certain obligations of<br />
public companies and (b) will allow more shell and blank check companies (with no<br />
employees) and reverse merger companies based outside of the United States to go public.<br />
Others contend that risk is part of investing. The actual effects of the IPO On-Ramp remain to<br />
be seen.<br />
Defining Emerging Growth Companies<br />
The IPO On-Ramp creates a new category of issuer, called an “emerging growth<br />
company,” which is comprised of any domestic or foreign issuer that has total annual gross<br />
revenues of less than $1 billion during its most recently completed fiscal year. It is curious that<br />
Congress picked $1billion as the threshold, as it encompasses an estimated 90% of all public<br />
companies, and companies with annual gross revenues of substantially less than $1billion are<br />
likely to be able to afford the regulatory costs associated with going public.<br />
43
An issuer will not be an emerging growth company if such issuer sold any common<br />
equity securities pursuant to a registration statement under the Securities Act of 1933, as<br />
amended (the “Securities Act”), on or prior to December 8, 2011. Also, while a business<br />
development company (generally a company whose purpose is to make investments in small,<br />
developing and financially troubled businesses) may qualify as an emerging growth<br />
company, issuers of asset backed securities and investment companies registered under the<br />
Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “Investment Company Act”), will not<br />
qualify as emerging growth companies.<br />
An emerging growth company will keep that designation for each subsequent fiscal<br />
year until the earliest of (a) the last day of the fiscal year during which it had total annual gross<br />
revenues of at least $1 billion (indexed for inflation every five years), (b) the last day of the<br />
fiscal year following the fifth anniversary of the date of the first sale of its common stock<br />
pursuant to an effective registration statement, (c) the date on which it has, during the<br />
previous three-year period, issued more than $1 billion in non-convertible debt or (d) the date<br />
on which it meets the definition of a “large accelerated filer”, generally a company with a<br />
public float of $700 million or more.<br />
Modifications to assist Emerging Growth Companies in Going Public<br />
Confidential Draft Registration Statements<br />
The IPO On-Ramp adds a new Section 6(e) to the Securities Act which permits an<br />
emerging growth company to submit a draft registration statement to the SEC on a<br />
confidential basis prior to the date of first sale of common equity securities pursuant to an<br />
effective registration statement under the Securities Act (which may be its initial public<br />
offering). While prior to the enactment of the JOBS Act, in certain circumstances, foreign<br />
private issuers were allowed to confidentially submit registration statements, historically a<br />
company seeking to make an initial public offering was required to publicly file its initial<br />
registration statement and disclose sensitive information regarding itself, often before the<br />
offering was priced. The SEC could then issue several rounds of comments on the company’s<br />
registration statement. Now, by making a confidential submission for registration, companies<br />
may avoid public scrutiny and reduce potentially negative publicity. Furthermore, (a) since a<br />
confidential submission is not considered a “filing” for liability purposes, it is not required to<br />
be signed by the company, its directors or senior management, or to include the consent of<br />
auditors and other experts and (b) no filing fee is due at the time of the confidential<br />
registration’s submission. Even so, a draft registration statement must be “substantially<br />
complete” and include a signed audit report of a registered public accounting firm with<br />
respect to the fiscal years presented. Also, the confidential submission process is only<br />
available for registrations under the Securities Act. Registrants under the Securities Exchange<br />
Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”), including registrants using Form 10 or Form<br />
20-F registration statements, may not avail themselves of the confidential submission<br />
process.<br />
44
In the event that an emerging growth company determines to move forward with an<br />
offering and submits confidential submissions to the SEC, its confidential submissions and all<br />
amendments to the confidential submissions must be included as exhibits to the publiclyavailable<br />
“filed” registration statement at least 21 days before the issuer conducts any road<br />
show as part of the offering or, if there is no road show, then the registration statement must<br />
include as an exhibit the confidential submissions no later than 21 days before the<br />
anticipated date of effectiveness of the registration statement. Due to the need to estimate<br />
the time period for a road show or to otherwise plan the 21 day period, it is important that<br />
any emerging growth company that avails itself of the confidential submission process<br />
coordinate with its underwriters and other service providers to prevent non-compliance with<br />
these timing requirements, otherwise the company’s offering could be needlessly delayed.<br />
The SEC staff has indicated that it will publicly release comment letters and an emerging<br />
growth company’s responses to staff comment letters on EDGAR no earlier than 20 business<br />
days following the registration statement effective date.<br />
The SEC has indicated that an emerging growth company which submits its draft<br />
registration statement on a confidential basis may not rely upon the Rule 134 Safe Harbor<br />
permitting public communications during an offering. However, after submitting a<br />
confidential submission to the SEC but before the actual filing of the registration statement,<br />
an emerging growth company may still publish a notice that complies with the safe harbor<br />
provisions of Rule 135 (which lists specific information that may be published by a<br />
prospective issuer during a public offering). While Rule 135 does not list a confidential<br />
submission as one of its safe-harbor disclosure items, a number of companies have already<br />
published Rule 135 compliant notices advising the public that they have confidentially<br />
submitted draft registration statements to the SEC.<br />
Reduced Registration Statement Disclosures<br />
The IPO On-Ramp also reduces an emerging growth company’s disclosure obligations<br />
in its registration statement. An emerging growth company may choose to provide only two<br />
years of audited financial statements in its registration statement as opposed to the three<br />
years previously required. Once public, emerging growth companies will be required to<br />
include three years of financial statements in their subsequently filed Form 10-K’s unless they<br />
are smaller reporting companies (generally companies with a public equity float of less than<br />
$75 million); however, such emerging growth companies will not need to include audited<br />
financial statements for any period prior to the earliest audited period made public in<br />
connection with its initial public offering.<br />
Each emerging growth company is also exempt from certain of the executive<br />
compensation disclosures to the same extent as a smaller reporting company, the most<br />
significant being the exemption from having to prepare and include in its initial registration<br />
statement (and any an annual proxy statement) a compensation discussion and analysis.<br />
45
Marketing Prior to Going Public<br />
The IPO On-Ramp loosens the limitations on brokers and dealers with respect to<br />
publishing or distributing research reports. Brokers and dealers may now publish and<br />
distribute research reports about an emerging growth company that is the subject of a<br />
proposed registered public offering of its common stock without such reports being deemed<br />
an offer to sell a security, even if such brokers or dealers are participating or will participate in<br />
the registered offering of the securities that are the subject of the report.<br />
The IPO On-Ramp also expands permissible communications before and after the<br />
filing of a registration statement by permitting an emerging growth company or any person<br />
authorized to act on its behalf to “test the waters” by engaging in oral or written<br />
communications with potential investors that are qualified institutional buyers or institutional<br />
accredited investors. Such mechanism allows an emerging growth company to determine<br />
whether such investors might have an interest in the contemplated securities offering and<br />
the likelihood of success if it decides to move forward with the offering. Prior to the JOBS Act,<br />
non-public companies and most public companies were prohibited from communicating<br />
with potential investors regarding a proposed offering without having filed a registration<br />
statement; such communications are commonly known as “gun jumping.” Under the new<br />
rules, test the waters communications are not considered gun jumping, allowing emerging<br />
growth companies to use these communications to gain insights into the views of<br />
institutional investors which could help them raise capital. The SEC staff has also indicated<br />
that it will not object if an emerging growth company determines that it will not treat a test<br />
the waters communication as a road show. It remains to be seen how popular this new<br />
communications regime will be, in that any communications to test the waters will still be<br />
subject to the federal securities laws’ anti-fraud rules and could raise concerns regarding<br />
selective disclosures, which may cause some prospective issuers to think twice before availing<br />
themselves of the opportunity.<br />
Reduced Reporting Requirements for Public Emerging Growth Companies<br />
Once an emerging growth company is public, such emerging growth company is<br />
exempt from certain obligations under the Securities Act and the Exchange Act that would<br />
otherwise apply to reporting companies, including:<br />
<br />
<br />
Section 404(b) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, as amended (“SOX”) requires a<br />
publicly-held company’s auditor to attest to, and report on, management’s<br />
assessment of its internal controls. The IPO On-Ramp amends SOX by eliminating the<br />
application of this requirement to emerging growth companies. This exemption was<br />
included in the JOBS Act legislation over Chairman Shapiro’s objections.<br />
The IPO On-Ramp further amends SOX by providing that any rules adopted by the<br />
Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (the “PCAOB”) which require mandatory<br />
audit firm rotation or a supplement to such auditor’s report providing additional<br />
information will not apply to any emerging growth company. The PCAOB has<br />
46
published a concept release on the subject of audit firm rotation and its potential to<br />
enhance auditor independence but no definitive rules have been adopted as of this<br />
writing. Also, any additional rules adopted by the PCAOB after April 5, <strong>2012</strong> will not<br />
apply to audits conducted on emerging growth companies unless the SEC finds that<br />
the application of such rules to emerging growth companies is in the public interest,<br />
after considering investor protection and the promotion of capital efficiency,<br />
competition and formation. With respect to the extension of time provided by the IPO<br />
On-Ramp to comply with new and/or revised financial accounting standards, at the<br />
time an emerging growth company is first required to file a registration statement or<br />
other periodic report, such emerging growth company must notify the SEC of its<br />
choice to take advantage or opt out of the extended transition period. A decision to<br />
opt out of the extended transition period is irrevocable and an emerging growth<br />
company may not select to comply with some standards but not others.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Any new or revised financial accounting standard will not apply to emerging growth<br />
companies until that date that private companies are required to comply with such<br />
new or revised financial accounting standards;<br />
The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 (“Dodd-<br />
Frank”) amended the Exchange Act to require certain companies to hold shareholder<br />
advisory votes on executive compensation and golden parachutes. The IPO On-Ramp<br />
exempts emerging growth companies from the so called say-on-pay vote and the<br />
advisory vote on golden parachute payments. Once a company no longer qualifies as<br />
an emerging growth company, such company must comply with these voting rules<br />
within one year of losing its status as an emerging growth company except that, if<br />
such company qualified as an emerging growth company for two years or less, it must<br />
comply with these rules within three years of losing its status.<br />
Dodd-Frank also (a) required certain companies to disclose information that shows the<br />
relationship between executive compensation and such companies’ financial<br />
performance, taking into account any change in the value of the shares of stock and<br />
any dividends or distributions and (b) required the SEC to promulgate rules requiring<br />
companies to disclose the ratio of the median of the total annual compensation of all<br />
employees of a company to the total annual compensation of a company’s chief<br />
executive officer (neither of which have been promulgated by the SEC as of this<br />
writing). The IPO On-Ramp exempts emerging growth companies from these<br />
requirements.<br />
Decimalization Study<br />
The IPO On-Ramp required the SEC to conduct a study examining the transition to<br />
trading and quoting securities of emerging growth companies in one penny increments,<br />
known as decimalization, to (a) examine the impact that decimalization has had on the<br />
number of initial public offerings since its implementation relative to the period before its<br />
implementation and (b) examine the impact that the change has had on liquidity for small<br />
47
and middle cap company securities and whether there are sufficient economic incentives to<br />
support trading operations in these securities in penny increments. If the SEC determined<br />
that the securities of emerging growth companies should be quoted and traded using a<br />
minimum increment of greater than one cent, the IPO On-Ramp permitted the SEC to enact<br />
rules designating a minimum increment for the securities of emerging growth companies<br />
that was greater than one cent but less than ten cents for use and quoting and trading of<br />
securities in any exchange or other execution venue.<br />
In July <strong>2012</strong>, the SEC staff completed the decimalization study and found that the<br />
effect of mandating an increase in the minimum tick size for smaller companies on the US<br />
market structure and on the willingness of such companies to initiate public offerings was<br />
uncertain. The SEC staff recommended that the SEC should not implement rules to increase<br />
the size of the minimum price increments for trading and quoting the securities of emerging<br />
growth companies but should consider additional steps to determine whether rulemaking<br />
should in the future be undertaken. It remains to be seen whether Congress or the SEC<br />
decides to further study this important matter or takes additional steps to increase the<br />
minimum increment for trading securities of emerging growth companies.<br />
Many commentators were disappointed with the SEC’s apparent lack of urgency on<br />
this matter and some, including these authors, believe that the decimalization issue, if<br />
addressed differently by the SEC, would have had important and far-reaching positive<br />
consequences for the IPO market of smaller and middle cap companies, as allowing a greater<br />
economic incentive to support trading operations could have helped bring back market<br />
makers in those securities and, consequently, would have helped create liquidity and interest<br />
in smaller and middle cap companies looking to go public.<br />
Review of Regulation S-K<br />
The IPO On-Ramp also requires the SEC to conduct a review of Regulation S-K to<br />
comprehensively analyze the current registration requirements of such regulation and<br />
determine how the requirements could be updated to modernize and simplify the<br />
registration process and reduce the costs and other burdens associated with these<br />
requirements for issuers who are emerging growth companies. The SEC’s report to Congress<br />
regarding Regulation S-K is due at the beginning of October <strong>2012</strong>.<br />
ACCESS TO CAPITAL FOR JOB CREATORS<br />
Title II of the JOBS Act, entitled “Access to <strong>Capital</strong> for Job Creators,” required the SEC to<br />
revised its rules relating to the prohibition against general solicitation and general advertising<br />
(contained in Section 502(c) of Regulation D promulgated under the Securities Act) in<br />
connection with a private offering of securities.<br />
Revisions Relating to Offerings Pursuant to Rule 506 of Regulation D<br />
Title II requires the SEC to revise Rule 506 of Regulation D so that the prohibition<br />
against general solicitation and general advertising would not apply to offers and sales of<br />
48
securities made pursuant to such rule when all purchasers of such securities are accredited<br />
investors. It also provides that the revised SEC rules must require issuers to take reasonable<br />
steps to verify that purchasers of the securities are accredited investors, using methods to be<br />
determined by the SEC.<br />
Rule 506 provides a non-exclusive safe harbor from registration for any private<br />
offering of securities for any amount so long as all investors in such securities are accredited<br />
investors (subject to a 35 person non-accredited investor limit so long as certain statutory<br />
information is provided to the potential investors). The restrictions on general solicitations<br />
and general advertising have forced issuers seeking to rely on Regulation D to take a cautious<br />
approach and strictly limit communications about their business and the offering. Proponents<br />
of the change argued that the new SEC rules will improve transparency and provide<br />
substantial benefit to investors, regulators and the public, by providing more accurate and<br />
complete information to the public, increasing communications between the entity and<br />
investors, and allowing regulatory agencies and the media to better monitor industry trends<br />
and activities.<br />
Title II of the JOBS Act also amends the Securities Act to provide that any person who<br />
offers securities for sale pursuant to Rule 506 of Regulation D or permits general solicitations,<br />
general advertisements, or similar or related activities shall not be deemed a broker or dealer<br />
so long as (a) such person receives no compensation in connection with the purchase or sale<br />
of the securities, (b) such person and any person associated with that person does not<br />
possess customer funds or securities in connection with the purchase or sale of such<br />
securities and (c) such person and any person associated with such person is not subject to a<br />
statutory disqualification under the Securities Act. This amendment encourages the<br />
formation of online platforms and forums that would assist in matching investors with<br />
companies seeking capital. Such online platforms and forums are playing an increasingly<br />
important role in facilitating capital formation in small companies.<br />
Revisions Relating to Secondary Sales Pursuant to Rule 144A<br />
Title II also provides for a similar lifting of the ban on general solicitation and general<br />
advertising under Rule 144A with respect to secondary sales of securities so long as securities<br />
sold under Rule 144A are sold only to persons that the seller and any person acting on the<br />
seller’s behalf reasonably believes is a qualified institutional buyer.<br />
Proposed SEC Rules<br />
As directed by the JOBS Act, on August 29, <strong>2012</strong>, the SEC released proposed rules<br />
designed to eliminate the prohibition against general solicitation and advertising under Rule<br />
506 of Regulation D and Rule 144A of the Securities Act.<br />
Under the proposed new Rule 506(c), companies issuing securities pursuant to Rule<br />
506 of Regulation D would be able to offer securities using general solicitation and general<br />
advertising provided that (a) the issuer takes reasonable steps to verify that purchasers are<br />
accredited investors, (b) the purchasers come within one of the categories of accredited<br />
49
investors under Rule 501 or the issuer reasonably believes that each of the purchasers meets<br />
one of the categories of accredited investors at the time of the sale of securities and (c) all<br />
terms and conditions of Rule 501, Rule 502(a) and Rule 502(d) are met. The SEC declined to<br />
provide a bright-line rule to determine whether “reasonable steps” have been taken by an<br />
issuer. Rather, to determine that an issuer took reasonable steps to verify that a purchaser is<br />
an accredited investor, the facts and circumstances of the transaction should be considered,<br />
including the following factors:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
The type of accredited investor and purchaser that the purchaser claims to be;<br />
The information relating to the purchaser obtained by the issuer, including the<br />
amount and type; and<br />
The offering’s nature, including the way in which the purchaser was solicited, and<br />
the offering terms, including the minimum investment amount.<br />
The proposed rules would also allow an issuer to comply with the existing Rule 506<br />
and not engage in general solicitation or general advertising. Such an issuer would then not<br />
need to comply with the new purchaser verification rules. Also, Form D would be amended to<br />
add a separate box for an issuer to check in the event that it intends to claim the new<br />
exemption permitting general solicitation and advertising.<br />
Within the release containing the proposed amendments to Rule 506, the SEC also<br />
discussed the JOBS Act amendment to Section 4 of the Securities Act and its effects on<br />
privately offered funds such as hedge funds and private equity funds. Privately offered funds<br />
routinely rely on the Rule 506 safe harbor to offer their securities without registering pursuant<br />
to the Securities Act. In addition, these privately offered funds generally avoid the regulatory<br />
provisions of the Investment Company Act by availing themselves of the exemptions from<br />
the definition of “investment company” under Section 3(c)(1) and Section 3(c)(7) of the<br />
Investment Company Act. Section 3(c)(1) of the Investment Company Act exempts from the<br />
definition of “investment company” issuers whose securities are beneficially owned by not<br />
more than 100 beneficial owners and who are not making or proposing to make a public<br />
offering of securities. Additionally, Section 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act exempts<br />
from the definition of “investment company” issuers whose securities are exclusively owned<br />
by “qualified purchasers” and who are not making or proposing to make a public offering of<br />
securities. The JOBS Act amends Section 4 of the Securities Act to state that offers and sales of<br />
securities exempt from registration under the Securities Act pursuant to Rule 506 are not<br />
public offerings as a result of general advertising and solicitation permitted pursuant to the<br />
amended Rule 506. In the proposed rules, the SEC staff acknowledged that the amendment to<br />
Section 4 of the Securities Act permits privately offered funds to make general solicitations<br />
pursuant to the revised Rule 506 without losing their exemption from the definition of<br />
“investment company” under the Investment Company Act.<br />
The proposed SEC rules would amend Rule 144A to permit parties engaging in a<br />
secondary sale of securities pursuant to Rule 144A to offer such securities by means of general<br />
50
solicitation to persons, whether or not such persons are qualified institutional buyers,<br />
provided that such securities are sold only to persons whom the seller reasonably believes are<br />
qualified institutional buyers.<br />
The SEC also addressed integration of Rule 506 and Rule 144A offerings with<br />
transactions made in compliance with Regulation S. Regulation S provides an exclusion from<br />
the registration requirements of the Securities Act for offerings made outside the United<br />
States by both U.S. and foreign issuers. The SEC clarified that, in accordance with the historical<br />
treatment of simultaneous Regulation S and Rule 144A or Rule 506 offerings by an issuer,<br />
offshore offerings that comply with Regulation S requirements would not be integrated with<br />
onshore offerings that comply with Rule 506 or Rule 144A, each, as amended by the proposed<br />
rules.<br />
Comments to the newly proposed rules may be received by the SEC within 30 days<br />
after publication of the proposed rules in the Federal Register. It remains to be seen whether<br />
the proposed rules are further amended prior to their adoption.<br />
CROWDFUND ACT<br />
Title III of the JOBS Act is entitled “<strong>Capital</strong> Raising Online While Deterring Fraud and<br />
Unethical Non-Disclosure Act of <strong>2012</strong>” or the “CROWDFUND Act.” “Crowdfunding”<br />
colloquially refers to raising capital from a “crowd” of small investors, generally through the<br />
internet. The crowdfunding provision, one of the most controversial parts of the JOBS Act,<br />
provides an exemption from registration under the Securities Act for any transaction<br />
involving the offer or sale of securities provided that (a) the aggregate amount sold to all<br />
investors during the twelve-month period preceding the date of the transaction is not more<br />
than $1.0 million, (b) the aggregate amount sold to any investor does not exceed (i) the<br />
greater of $2,000 or 5% of the annual income or net worth of the investor (if either the annual<br />
income or the net worth of the investor is less than $100,000) and (ii) 10% of the annual<br />
income or net worth of the investor (if either of the annual income or net worth of the<br />
investor equal to or more than $100,000), not to exceed a maximum aggregate amount sold<br />
of $100,000, (c) the transaction is conducted through an SEC registered broker or funding<br />
portal who complies with new Section 4A(a) (discussed further below) and (d) the issuer<br />
complies with the requirements under new Section 4A(b) (discussed further below).<br />
A registered funding portal is any person that acts as an intermediary in a transaction<br />
involving the offer or sale of securities for the account of others, solely pursuant to the<br />
crowdfunding exemption and that does not (a) offer investment advice or recommendations,<br />
(b) solicit purchases, sales, or offers to buy the securities offered or displayed on its website or<br />
portal, (c) compensate employees, agents, or other persons for such solicitation or based on<br />
the sale of securities displayed or referenced on its website or portal, (d) hold, manage,<br />
possess, or otherwise handle investor funds or securities or (e) engage in such other activities<br />
as the SEC, by rule, determines appropriate. Subject to rulemaking by the SEC, a funding<br />
portal shall be exempt from the requirement to register as a broker or dealer, provided that it<br />
registers with the SEC as a funding portal and (x) remains subject to the examination,<br />
51
enforcement, and other rulemaking authority of the SEC, (y) is a member of a national<br />
securities association registered under Section 15A of the Exchange Act and (z) is subject to<br />
such other requirements as the SEC determines appropriate. As of this writing, the Financial<br />
Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) is the only existing national securities association<br />
registered under Section 15A of the Exchange Act.<br />
Section 4A(a) provides that the SEC registered broker or funding portal must:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Provide such disclosures, including disclosures relating to risks and other investor<br />
education materials, as the SEC by rule deems appropriate.<br />
Ensure that each investor (a) reviews investor education information in accordance<br />
with SEC standards, (b) positively affirms that the investor understands that the<br />
investor is risking the loss of the entire investment and that the investor could bear<br />
such a loss and (c) answers questions demonstrating an understanding of the level of<br />
risks generally applicable to investments in start-ups, emerging businesses and small<br />
issuers, an understanding of the risk of liquidity and an understanding of such other<br />
matters as the SEC determines appropriate by rule.<br />
Take such measures to reduce the risk of fraud with respect to the transactions as<br />
established by the SEC by rule, including obtaining a background and securities<br />
enforcement regulatory history check on each officer, director and person holding<br />
more than 20% of the outstanding equity of every issuer whose securities are offered<br />
by such person under the crowdfunding exemption.<br />
Not later than 21 days prior to the first day on which securities are sold to any investor<br />
or such other period as the SEC may establish, make available to the SEC and potential<br />
investors any information provided by the issuer pursuant to this rule (as described<br />
below).<br />
Ensure that all offering proceeds are only provided to the issuer when the aggregate<br />
capital raised from all investors is equal to or greater than the target offering amount<br />
and allow all investors to cancel their commitments to invest as the SEC shall by rule<br />
determine appropriate.<br />
Make such efforts as the SEC determines appropriate by rule to ensure that no investor<br />
in a twelve-month period has purchased securities pursuant to this section that in the<br />
aggregate from all issuers exceed the crowdfunding offering investment limits.<br />
Take such steps to protect the privacy of information collected from investors as the<br />
SEC shall by rule determine appropriate.<br />
Not compensate brokers, finders, or lead generators for providing the broker or<br />
funding portal with personal identifying information of any potential investor.<br />
52
Prohibit its directors, officers, or partners from having any financial interest in an issuer<br />
using its services.<br />
Meet such other requirements as the SEC may by rule prescribe for the protection of<br />
investors and in the public interest.<br />
The crowdfunding exemption is limited to domestic issuers that are not SEC reporting<br />
companies, investment companies or certain companies exempt from the definition of<br />
investment companies. The Crowdfund Act also permits the SEC to establish additional<br />
limitations on the types of issuers that may use the crowdfunding exemption. Section 4A(b)<br />
provides that any issuer of securities availing itself of the crowdfunding exemption:<br />
<br />
Will be required to file with the SEC and provide to investors and the relevant broker<br />
or funding portal, and make available to potential investors:<br />
o the name, legal status, physical address, and website address of the issuer;<br />
o the names of the directors, officers and each person holding more than 20% of the<br />
shares of the issuer;<br />
o a description of the business of the issuer and the anticipated business plan of the<br />
issuer;<br />
o a description of the financial condition of the issuer, including the income tax<br />
returns filed by the issuer for the most recently completed year (if any) and<br />
financial statements of the issuer certified by the principal executive officer of the<br />
issuer to be true and complete in all material respects for targeted offerings of<br />
$100,000 or less, financial statements reviewed by an independent public<br />
accountant, using professional standards and procedures for such review or<br />
standards and procedures established by the SEC by rule, for such purpose for<br />
targeted offerings of more than $100,000 but not more than $500,000, and audited<br />
financial statements for targeted offerings of more than $500,000;<br />
o a description of the stated purpose and intended use of the proceeds of the<br />
offering;<br />
o the target offering amount, the deadline to reach the target offering amount, and<br />
regular updates regarding the progress of the issuer in meeting the target offering<br />
amount;<br />
o the price to the public of the securities or the method for determining the price,<br />
provided that, prior to sale, each investor shall be provided in writing the final<br />
price and all required disclosures, with a reasonable opportunity to rescind the<br />
commitment to purchase the securities; and<br />
o a detailed description of the ownership and capital structure of the issuer.<br />
53
May not advertise the terms of the offering, except for notices which direct investors<br />
to the funding portal or broker.<br />
May not compensate or commit to compensate any person to promote its offerings<br />
through a broker or funding portal without taking steps to ensure that such person<br />
discloses the past or prospective receipt of such compensation.<br />
Not less than annually, file with the SEC and provide to investors reports of the results<br />
of operations and financial statements of the issuer.<br />
The crowdfunding rules provide that any person who purchases a security in a<br />
crowdfunding transaction may bring a rescission action against an issuer to recover the<br />
consideration paid for such security (with interest, but less the amount of any income<br />
received thereon), or for damages if such person no longer owns the security, in the event the<br />
issuer violates the antifraud provisions of the securities laws, provided that the purchaser did<br />
not know of such untruth or omission.<br />
Securities issued pursuant to a crowdfunding transaction may not be transferred by<br />
the purchaser of such securities for one year from the date of purchase, unless such securities<br />
are transferred to the issuer of the securities, to an accredited investor, as part of an offering<br />
registered with the SEC, to a member of the family of the purchaser, or in connection with the<br />
death or divorce of the purchaser or, at the SEC’s discretion, other similar circumstances. The<br />
SEC may, by rule, establish further transfer limitations.<br />
Not later than 270 days after April 5, <strong>2012</strong>, the SEC is required to issue such rules as it<br />
determines may be necessary or appropriate for the protection of investors to carry out the<br />
crowdfunding exemption, including to establish disqualification provisions under which an<br />
issuer shall not be eligible to offer securities pursuant to the crowdfunding exemption and a<br />
broker or funding portal shall not be eligible to effect or participate in transactions pursuant<br />
to the exemption.<br />
The SEC is also mandated, by rule not later than 270 days after April 5, <strong>2012</strong>, to exempt<br />
securities acquired pursuant to a crowdfunding offering from the provisions of Section 12(g)<br />
of the Exchange Act.<br />
Although offerings relying on the crowdfunding exemptions and funding portals are<br />
generally exempt under state blue sky law, states will still have antifraud oversight with<br />
respect to any such offerings, and under certain circumstances are permitted to require<br />
notice filings and fees in relation thereto.<br />
The crowdfunding rules have received a lot of press, in part because of its novelty<br />
when compared to historic securities offering alternatives, in part because of the fear of abuse<br />
by bad actors and in part because of the success of similar business models that do not sell<br />
securities such as Kickstarter, Inc., a funding platform for creative projects. Regardless of the<br />
amount of press, there is still much uncertainty about crowdfunding and whether it will take<br />
its place as a legitimate form of capital formation. The SEC has publicly stated that no person<br />
54
may rely on the crowdfunding rules and no person may act as a crowdfunding intermediary,<br />
even if they are a registered broker, until the SEC has adopted the rules mandated by the<br />
JOBS Act, which will not be at least until the end of <strong>2012</strong>. Furthermore, in the quest to protect<br />
investors, it is likely that the SEC will include in the new rules additional safeguards not<br />
otherwise contemplated by the JOBS Act but not impermissible, which may have the effect of<br />
stifling a crowdfunding market that would otherwise develop. There is also the possibility<br />
that crowdfunding as it is currently proposed will not work as well as it is intended, similar to<br />
the original Regulation A (discussed below), because the threshold of $1.0 million is too low<br />
for broad-based use by issuers, there may be significant costs to implement a crowdfunding<br />
offering, there may not be enough financial incentive to attract the intermediaries that are<br />
required to facilitate the offerings, and issuers who otherwise would use crowdfunding will<br />
instead rely on more customary ways to raise money, such as Regulation D.<br />
We can only hope that any rules adopted by the SEC are sensible and attempt to strike<br />
the right balance between capital formation and investor protection, and not a reaction<br />
against what the SEC may consider an unfamiliar or suspicious funding alternative.<br />
SMALL COMPANY CAPITAL FORMATION<br />
Title IV of the JOBS Act, entitled “Small Company <strong>Capital</strong> Formation,” is designed to<br />
breathe new life into the existing limited offering exemption known as Regulation A. As<br />
initially codified, Regulation A provided an exemption from the Securities Act registration<br />
requirements for US and Canadian issuers (other than SEC reporting companies, development<br />
stage companies, registered investment companies and certain other categories of<br />
companies) who intended to raise not more than $5 million in a rolling twelve month period.<br />
Such issuers were required to go through a federal filing and review process beginning with<br />
the filing of an offering statement pursuant to Form 1-A. Also, unlike offerings under<br />
Regulation D, Regulation A offering were generally subject to state securities laws. Primarily<br />
due to the expense in preparing the required Form 1-A, the relatively limiting $5 million cap<br />
on the amount that may be raised, and the added expense of having to register the offering<br />
under blue sky laws, Regulation A was infrequently used as an offering alternative. According<br />
to one report from the U.S. Government Accountability Office, Regulation A offerings filed<br />
with the SEC decreased from 116 in 1997 to 19 in 2011.<br />
Title IV changes the existing paradigm by amending the Securities Act to require that<br />
the SEC enact rules and regulations (a) increasing the offering limit from $5 million to $50<br />
million and (b) making the securities sold pursuant to Regulation A “covered securities,” thus<br />
exempting them from most blue sky laws if the securities are offered and sold on a national<br />
securities exchange or to qualified purchasers. The amendments also codify the following:<br />
<br />
<br />
The securities sold in any Regulation A offering are not “restricted” securities and<br />
instead may be offered and sold publicly.<br />
The civil liability provision in Section 12(a)(2) of the Securities Act applies to any<br />
person offering or selling such securities.<br />
55
The issuer may solicit interest in the offering prior to filing any offering statement, on<br />
such terms and conditions as the SEC may prescribe in the public interest or for the<br />
protection of investors.<br />
The SEC, by rule or regulation, shall require the issuer to annually file audited financial<br />
statements with the SEC and may require the issuer to make available to investors and<br />
file with the SEC, periodic disclosures relating to such issuer’s business operations,<br />
finances, corporate governance, use of investor funds and other matters deemed<br />
appropriate by the SEC. The SEC may also choose to suspend and/or terminate any<br />
such reporting requirement for an issuer.<br />
Such other terms, conditions, or requirements as the SEC may determine necessary in<br />
the public interest and for the protection of investors.<br />
Only equity securities, debt securities, and debt securities convertible or exchangeable<br />
to equity interests, including any guarantees of such securities, may be offered and sold<br />
pursuant to the revised exemption.<br />
It remains to be seen whether, pursuant to its rulemaking, the SEC will create a set of<br />
two exemptions, a $5 million Regulation A offering and alternate $50 million Regulation A<br />
offering, or one integrated Regulation A offering reflecting the new $50 million cap. Every two<br />
years, the SEC is required to review the $50 million offering amount limitation and increase<br />
such amount as the SEC determines appropriate. If the SEC determines not to increase such<br />
amount, it is required to report its reasons for not increasing the amount to the Committee on<br />
Financial Services of the House of Representatives and the Committee on Banking, Housing<br />
and Urban Affairs of the Senate.<br />
Though the crowdfunding exemption described above has received a lot of press,<br />
many commentators believe that the revised Regulation A will be the biggest boon to small<br />
capitalization companies. Such companies may now choose to forgo an initial public offering<br />
and instead pursue a private offering pursuant to Regulation A because, unlike offerings<br />
pursuant to the crowdfunding exemption and Rule 506, the securities issued are not<br />
restricted and, upon their issuance, are freely tradable. As a result, securities issued pursuant<br />
to Regulation A offer more liquidity to investors and could result in the creation of a healthy<br />
secondary market in such securities. Also, unlike the crowdfunding exemption, companies<br />
issuing securities pursuant to Regulation A are not capped at $1 million and, unlike offerings<br />
pursuant to Rule 506, the accredited investor requirements are not applicable to such sales of<br />
securities. In addition, similar to the new Rule 506(c), an issuer may publish or deliver to<br />
prospective purchasers a written document or make scripted radio or television broadcasts to<br />
determine whether there is any interest in a contemplated securities offering, following<br />
submission of the written document or script of the broadcast to the SEC.<br />
The JOBS Act does not contain a deadline by which the SEC must promulgate rules<br />
applying the provisions of the Small Company Formation title. Therefore, it is not yet known<br />
when issuers may begin to enjoy the benefits of the revised Regulation A.<br />
56
PRIVATE COMPANY FLEXIBILITY AND GROWTH<br />
Title V of the JOBS Act is entitled “Private Company Flexibility and Growth” and is<br />
designed to address the issue of a private company being forced to go public prematurely<br />
due to the company reaching the 500 stockholder limit under Section 12(g) of the Exchange<br />
Act. A company that is registered under Section 12(g) of the Exchange Act is required to file<br />
with the SEC periodic reports such as annual reports on Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form<br />
10-Q and current reports on Form 8-K and be subject to the proxy rules. This title amends<br />
Section 12(g) to increase the thresholds pursuant to which a company would be required to<br />
register under Section 12(g) from 500 record holders to either 2,000 record holders or 500<br />
record holders who are not accredited investors.<br />
This title also revises the definition of “held of record” set forth in Section 12(g)(5) of<br />
the Exchange Act to exclude securities held by persons who received such securities pursuant<br />
to an employee compensation plan in a transaction exempt from registration under Section 5<br />
of the Securities Act. The SEC is required to adopt rules implementing this change in the<br />
definition, as well as to adopt safe harbor provisions that issuers can follow when determining<br />
whether holders of their securities received the securities pursuant to an employee<br />
compensation plan in transactions that were exempt from the registration requirements of<br />
Section 5 of the Securities Act. These rules will therefore be very important to companies that<br />
need to monitor their record holders because they are approaching the thresholds for Section<br />
12(g) registration, as mistakes in counting could potentially cause a company to inadvertently<br />
become a reporting company. As of this writing, the SEC has not adopted these rules;<br />
however, according to certain frequently asked questions issued by the SEC, the absence of<br />
the safe harbor rule does not preclude reliance on the amendment to Section 12(g)(5) of the<br />
Exchange Act and, therefore, as of April 5, <strong>2012</strong>, an issuer may exclude persons who received<br />
securities pursuant to an exempt employee compensation plan regardless of whether or not<br />
the person is a current employee of such issuer.<br />
The determination of who is a record holder or holder of record would be made within<br />
120 days after the last day of the first fiscal year ended on which an issuer has total assets<br />
exceeding $10 million. The amendments to the Exchange Act required by Title V of the JOBS<br />
Act will likely make it more complicated and difficult to determine the number of<br />
shareholders of record a particular company has at any given point. It is also not clear how to<br />
treat these exempted shares if they are subsequently sold by or otherwise transferred from<br />
the original holder.<br />
As widely reported in the press in the lead-up to Facebook’s IPO, some private<br />
companies who were not yet ready to go public were in any event forced to do so due to<br />
pushing up against the 500 record holder limit, as a result of the companies granting equity<br />
compensation to their employees or otherwise privately issuing securities to investors, or as a<br />
result of private secondary market trading. Other private companies, in order to avoid going<br />
public, were forced to structure their equity compensation plans in such a way to avoid their<br />
employees from being counted towards the 500 record holder limit, but which limited the<br />
form of equity compensation the companies were permitted to grant. This title puts some<br />
57
common sense back into Section 12(g) and the SEC’s interpretations of Section 12(g), by<br />
allowing companies to remain private while retaining flexibility with respect to equity<br />
compensation grants to employees, as well as encouraging the growth of private secondary<br />
markets of securities by enabling the easing of restrictions on transfer of company stock by<br />
employees and other stockholders. It is ironic, though, that the same act that created the IPO<br />
On-Ramp to facilitate IPOs also provides a method to delay companies from being forced to<br />
go public by increasing the record holder threshold for registration under Section 12(g) of the<br />
Exchange Act.<br />
Title V of the JOBS Act also requires the SEC to examine its authority to enforce Rule<br />
12g5–1 (relating to the definition of securities “held of record”), to determine if new<br />
enforcement tools are needed to enforce the anti-evasion provision contained in subsection<br />
(b)(3) of that rule. Rule 12g5-1(b)(3) provides that if an issuer knows or has reason to know<br />
that the form of holding securities of record is used primarily to circumvent the registration<br />
requirements of the Exchange Act, the beneficial owners of such securities shall be deemed<br />
to be the record owners thereof. The JOBS Act required the SEC to transmit its<br />
recommendations on this topic to Congress not later than 120 days after April 5, <strong>2012</strong>.<br />
CAPITAL EXPANSION<br />
Title VI of the JOBS Act is entitled “<strong>Capital</strong> Expansion.” The title assists banks and bank<br />
holding companies by amending Section 12(g) of the Exchange Act to increase the threshold<br />
for registration and deregistration under the Exchange Act. Prior to the passage of Title VI,<br />
companies with 500 or more shareholders of record were required to register with SEC. Also, a<br />
company could not “go dark” and cease filing periodic reports with the SEC until such<br />
company had less than 300 holders of record. As a result of Title VI a bank or a bank holding<br />
company will not need to register with the SEC pursuant to Section 12(g) until it has total<br />
assets exceeding $10 million and a class of equity security (other than an exempted security)<br />
held of record by 2,000 or more persons. Such bank or bank holding company may deregister<br />
(or “go dark”) and suspend its reporting obligations under Section 15(d) of the Exchange Act if<br />
the number of record holders falls below 1,200 persons. The SEC has indicated that if a bank<br />
or bank holding company has less than 1,200 holders of record for a class of securities, such<br />
bank or bank holding company may file a Form 15 to terminate the Section 12(g) registration<br />
of that class. Form 15 has not yet been amended to reflect the change to Exchange Act<br />
Section 12(g)(4). Therefore, the SEC has directed such bank or bank holding company to<br />
include an explanatory note in its Form 15 indicating that it is relying on Exchange Act<br />
Section 12(g)(4) to terminate its duty to file reports with respect to that class of equity<br />
security.<br />
The SEC is required to issue final regulations to implement Title VI of the JOBS Act and<br />
the amendments made by such title within one year of enactment. It is anticipated that this<br />
title will result in greater flexibility for banks and bank holding companies with respect to<br />
their capital raising efforts.<br />
58
OUTREACH ON CHANGES TO THE LAW<br />
Title VII of the JOBS Act, entitled “Outreach on Changes to the Law,” is the shortest title<br />
of the JOBS Act. Pursuant to the title, the SEC is directed to provide online information and<br />
conduct outreach to inform small and medium sized businesses, women owned businesses,<br />
veteran owned businesses, and minority owned businesses of the changes made by the JOBS<br />
Act.<br />
CONCLUSION<br />
Congress ostensibly enacted the JOBS Act to spur job creation and economic growth<br />
in the United States by improving access by emerging growth companies to the public capital<br />
markets. They reasoned that public offerings contribute to job growth because they give<br />
companies access to capital thus allowing them to grow and that growing companies hire<br />
more employees. Others point out that there is nothing in the JOBS Act that actually requires<br />
the creation of jobs. Also, many are concerned that the JOBS Act will not invigorate the public<br />
markets and will instead result in boosting the private markets instead. They note that, while<br />
Title I of the JOBS Act aims to encourage economic growth by decreasing the disclosure and<br />
reporting requirements for emerging growth companies that seek to engage in a public<br />
offering, on the other hand, Title II through Title VI strive to encourage economic grow by<br />
eliminating restrictions against general solicitation and advertising for Rule 506 of Regulation<br />
D, creating an exemption from registration for crowdfunding, creating new exempt securities<br />
under Regulation A and raising the thresholds for mandatory registration. These provisions<br />
operate to offer alternatives to going public for companies attempting to raise capital.<br />
Only time will tell if the JOBS Act has the intended effect envisioned by Congress, in<br />
part because we must still await substantial rulemaking from the SEC before issuers and their<br />
advisers can take full advantage of the opportunities that the JOBS Act has to offer.<br />
Unfortunately, these authors are already seeing some set-backs since enactment, with the<br />
SEC declining to address the fundamental problems resulting from decimalization, in its July<br />
<strong>2012</strong> study on the topic. It is uncertain as to when the SEC will complete its rulemaking and<br />
implementation under the JOBS Act. The SEC still has not completed all rulemaking initiatives<br />
called for under the Dodd-Frank Act, and SEC Chairman Shapiro has publicly stated that some<br />
of the time limits set forth in the JOBS Act are aggressive and may not be achievable within<br />
the indicated time limits. Furthermore, SEC Chairman Shapiro has made no secret of her belief<br />
that much of the JOBS Act weakens investor protection, and the jury is still out as to whether<br />
any SEC rulemaking will shift away from Congressional intent for the sake of protecting<br />
investors, by adding regulations to the extend the SEC has the authority to do so. It will also<br />
take time to see if the loudest critics of the JOBS Act will be vindicated as a result of any<br />
scandals stemming from the loosening of existing regulations to protect investors. We at<br />
<strong>Herrick</strong>, Feinstein LLP believe that the JOBS Act includes some very good ideas to balance<br />
what has arguably been over-regulation and the requirements for over-disclosure (and the<br />
resulting costs) over the past ten years, but are not certain as to whether any of the provisions<br />
of the JOBS Act or the resulting rules will truly spur an IPO boom or assist companies to more<br />
easily obtain capital.<br />
59
HERRICK, FEINSTEIN LLP’s<br />
SIXTH ANNUAL CAPITAL MARKETS SYMPOSIUM<br />
OCTOBER 2, <strong>2012</strong><br />
TRACKING DERIVATIVES REGULATION<br />
UNDER DODD-FRANK<br />
BY PATRICK D. SWEENEY and JULIE ALBINSKY
TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
Page<br />
I. INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 65<br />
II. DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................................ 65<br />
1. Swaps, Security Based Swaps and Mixed Swaps. ...................................................... 66<br />
2. Swap Dealers and Security Based Swap Dealers. ...................................................... 72<br />
3. Major Swap Participants and Major Security-Based Swap Participants. .......... 77<br />
4. Eligible Contract Participant ("ECP")............................................................................... 79<br />
5. Effective Dates and Compliance Dates. ........................................................................ 79<br />
III.<br />
REPORTING AND RECORDKEEPING OF SWAP TRANSACTION DATA;<br />
REGISTRATION AND REGULATION OF SWAP DATA REPOSITORIES ................................... 80<br />
1. Reporting and Recordkeeping Requirements. ........................................................... 80<br />
2. Reporting and Recordkeeping Requirements for Pre-Enactment<br />
Swaps ......................................................................................................................................... 82<br />
3. Registration and Regulation of SDRs ............................................................................. 83<br />
IV. MANDATORY CLEARING ..................................................................................................................... 86<br />
1. Proposed Rules Regarding the Clearing Requirement ........................................... 87<br />
2. Compliance Schedule for Mandatory Clearing .......................................................... 88<br />
3. End-User and Other Exemptions ..................................................................................... 88<br />
4. Process for Review of Swaps for Mandatory Clearing ............................................. 91<br />
5. Customer Clearing Documentation, Timing of Acceptance for<br />
Clearing and Clearing Member Risk ............................................................................... 92<br />
6. Protection of Cleared Swaps Customer Contracts and Collateral ...................... 94<br />
7. Core Principles for DCOs ..................................................................................................... 95<br />
8. Proposed Rules Regarding SBS CA Standards for Operation and<br />
Governance ............................................................................................................................. 98<br />
9. Proposed Rules Regarding Mitigating Conflicts of Interest for<br />
DCOs/CAs, DCMs, SEFs and SBS Exchanges ..............................................................100<br />
V. REGISTRATION AND REGULATION OF SWAP DEALERS AND MAJOR SWAP<br />
PARTICIPANTS ......................................................................................................................................102<br />
1. Registration of Swap Dealers and Major Swap Participants ...............................102<br />
2. Business Conduct Standards for Swap Dealers and Major Swap<br />
Participants ............................................................................................................................104<br />
3. Duties of Swap Dealers and Major Swap Participants ...........................................110<br />
4. Recordkeeping Rules for Swap Dealers and Major Swap Participants ............115
5. Proposed Rules Regarding Margin Requirements for Uncleared Swaps<br />
for Swap Dealers and Major Swap Participants .......................................................117<br />
6. Proposed Rules Regarding <strong>Capital</strong> Requirements for Uncleared Swaps<br />
for Swap Dealers and Major Swap Participants .......................................................119<br />
VI.<br />
MANDATORY TRADE EXECUTION REQUIREMENT; REGULATION OF SWAP<br />
EXECUTION FACILITIES AND DESIGNATED CONTRACT MARKETS....................................120<br />
1. Confirmation; Portfolio Reconciliation; Portfolio Compression; and<br />
Trading Relationship Documentation .........................................................................120<br />
2. Proposed Rules Regarding Position Limits ................................................................125<br />
3. Registration of Foreign Boards of Trade .....................................................................130<br />
4. Proposed Rules Regarding Core Principles for SEFs and SBS SEFs ...................130<br />
5. Proposed Rules Regarding Core Principles for DCMs ............................................134<br />
VII. CROSS-BORDER APPLICATION OF SWAPS RULES ...................................................................135<br />
1. Cross-Border Framework ..................................................................................................135<br />
2. Registration and Regulation of Non-U.S. SDs and MSPs ......................................136<br />
3. Regulation of Other Non-U.S. Market Participants .................................................137<br />
4. Compliance Phase-In .........................................................................................................137<br />
VIII. SUMMARY OF COMPLIANCE DATES ............................................................................................138
I. INTRODUCTION<br />
TRACKING DERIVATIVES REGULATION UNDER DODD-FRANK 1<br />
Title VII of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010<br />
(the "Dodd-Frank Act") mandated the comprehensive regulation of derivatives trading in the<br />
U.S. financial markets, no later than July 2011. Clearly there has been some slippage in this<br />
targeted date. Notwithstanding, the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (the "CFTC")<br />
and the Securities and Exchange Commission (the "SEC"), which will jointly regulate the<br />
derivatives markets, 2 have made considerable headway in formulating the regulations and in<br />
laying down a rational plan for their implementation.<br />
In June <strong>2012</strong>, the SEC released a general policy statement (the "General Policy<br />
Statement") with regard to the sequencing of compliance dates for its rules applicable to<br />
security-based swaps. Although the CFTC has not issued a similar statement with respect to<br />
swap regulations, it is evident from the manner in which the CFTC has categorized its<br />
principal rulemaking endeavors, and related compliance dates, that it generally shares the<br />
SEC’s view on the appropriate phasing of compliance dates.<br />
The SEC proposes that the derivatives regulations for swaps be implemented in five,<br />
principal, sequential groups of regulations: (i) definitional and cross-border rules, (ii) swap<br />
data repository ("SDR") registration and transaction reporting, (iii) mandatory clearing, (iv)<br />
swap dealer ("SD") and major swap participant ("MSP") registration and regulation, and (v)<br />
swap execution facility ("SEF") registration and regulation and the mandatory trade execution<br />
requirement.<br />
This article will outline actual and anticipated developments in derivatives regulation<br />
on the basis of the groupings of regulations set forth in the General Policy Statement.<br />
II.<br />
DEFINITIONS<br />
The definition of key terms is the core of derivatives regulation, not only because these<br />
definitions impact which products and persons will be subject to the new regulations, but<br />
also because the compliance dates for much of the derivatives regulation are tied to the<br />
compliance dates for the definitional rules. The Dodd-Frank Act set out the basic definitions<br />
for the products (e.g., swaps, security-based swaps, mixed swaps) and the players (e.g., swap<br />
dealers, major security-based swap participants), and further mandated that the Commissions<br />
clarify the statutory definitions and craft appropriate exclusions. Acting on this mandate, in<br />
the spring of <strong>2012</strong>, the Commissions jointly enacted two final rules (the "Definition Rules")<br />
1 This article is current as of September 15, <strong>2012</strong>.<br />
2 Jurisdiction of the CFTC and the SEC over derivatives regulation is determined primarily with reference to the<br />
terms "swap" and "security‐based swap". See Section II.1 for the regulatory definitions of these terms. For ease of<br />
reference, this article will refer generally to swaps, except where the distinctions between the two terms are<br />
germane to the discussion.<br />
65
further defining and interpreting the derivatives definitions set forth in Dodd-Frank Act and<br />
laying out various exclusions.<br />
1. Swaps, Security Based Swaps and Mixed Swaps.<br />
(a) Definition of Swap. "Swap" is defined broadly by the Dodd-Frank Act to<br />
include most over-the-counter ("OTC") derivatives. The Dodd-Frank Act specifically<br />
enumerates various types of swaps included in the definition (interest rate swaps, rate<br />
floor/cap/collar, cross-currency rate swap, equity/debt index swap) and also contains a broad<br />
catch-all clause including any agreement, contract or transaction that is, or in the future,<br />
becomes known in the trade as a swap. Rate swaps, currency swaps, equity swaps, credit<br />
default swaps and commodity swaps are all included in the definition. Excluded from the<br />
definition of swap are futures traded on an exchange; futures that will be physically settled;<br />
calls, options and straddles on securities that are subject to the Securities Act of 1933 (the<br />
"Securities Act") and the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the "Exchange Act"); foreign<br />
currency swaps entered into on an SEC registered exchange; transactions based on a security<br />
entered into for capital raising purposes; and any sale of a nonfinancial commodity or any<br />
security for deferred shipment or delivery, so long as the transaction is physically settled. The<br />
Definition Rules do not supplement the statutory definition of "swap"; however, they do<br />
clarify the treatment under this definition of certain types of agreements, contracts and<br />
transactions, as discussed in Section II.1(d) below.<br />
(b) Definition of Security-Based Swap. A "security-based swap" is defined in<br />
the Dodd-Frank Act as a swap that is based on a narrow-based security index, a single security<br />
or loan, or on the occurrence (or nonoccurrence or extent of occurrence) of an event relating<br />
to an issuer or issuers in a narrow-based security index, which event directly affects the<br />
financial statements, financial condition or financial obligation of the issuer or issuers.<br />
Excluded from the definition is any agreement, contract or transaction that meets the<br />
definition only because it references, is based on, or settles through the transfer or delivery of<br />
an exempted security 3 under the Exchange Act (unless the transaction is a put, call or other<br />
option). As with the definition of "swap", the Definition Rules do not supplement the<br />
statutory definition of "security-based swap"; however, they do clarify the treatment under<br />
this definition of certain types of agreements, contracts and transactions, as discussed in<br />
Section II.1(d) below.<br />
(c) Mixed Swap. A mixed swap is a security-based swap which is also based<br />
on the value of one or more interest or other rates, currencies, commodities, instruments of<br />
3 "Exempted securities" are defined in Section 3(a)(12) of the Exchange Act to include (i) government and<br />
municipal securities, (ii) any interest or participation in any common trust fund or similar fund that is not an<br />
"investment company" under the Investment Company Act of 1940, (iii) any interest or participation in a single or<br />
collective trust fund maintained by a bank, (iv) any security issued by or any interest or participation in a pooled<br />
income fund, collective trust fund, or similar fund that is not an "investment company" under the Investment<br />
Company Act of 1940, (v) for certain purposes under the Exchange Act only, any security issued by any interest or<br />
participation in any church plan, company or account that is not an "investment company" under the Investment<br />
Company Act of 1940, (vi) other securities as the SEC may specify.<br />
66
indebtedness, indices, quantitative measures, other financial or economic interest or property<br />
of any kind (other than a single security or a narrow-based security index) or the occurrence<br />
of certain events. The category of mixed swaps is very narrow and is intended solely to insure<br />
that there are no gaps in the regulation of swaps and security-based swaps. A bilateral,<br />
uncleared mixed swap will be a transaction that is both a swap and a security-based swap. An<br />
example of a mixed swap is an instrument in which the underlying reference is a portfolio of<br />
both securities (assuming the portfolio is not an index or, if it is an index, that the index is<br />
narrow-based) and commodities. Mixed swaps with dealers and major participants registered<br />
with both the CFTC and SEC as counterparty will be subject to CFTC rules and requirements of<br />
federal securities laws. All other mixed swaps will be regulated either pursuant to a joint<br />
order from the Commissions determining whether the mixed swap will be governed by the<br />
Commodity Exchange Act ("CEA") and/or the Exchange Act, or by parallel requirements of<br />
both the CEA and the Exchange Act.<br />
(d) Additional Exclusions and Clarifications Regarding the Definitions of<br />
"Swap" and "Security-Based Swap".<br />
(i) Insurance. The Definition Rules clarify that traditional insurance<br />
products that otherwise fall within the definition of swap or security-based swap will not be<br />
considered swaps or security-based swaps so long as they satisfy the requirements of the<br />
insurance safe harbor. In order to qualify for the insurance safe harbor and thereby not be<br />
considered a swap or security-based swap, an agreement, contract or transaction must (i)<br />
either (A) satisfy the "product test" (which contains four elements: (1) the beneficiary must<br />
have an insurable interest and thereby continuously carry the risk of loss; (2) loss must occur<br />
and be proved, which will ensure that the beneficiary has a stake in the insurable interest; (3)<br />
the insurance product must not be traded separately from the insured interest on an<br />
organized market or over the counter; and (4) in the case of financial guaranty insurance<br />
policies (i.e. bond insurance or bond wraps), any acceleration of payment under the policy<br />
must be at the sole discretion of the insurance provider) or (B) be an "enumerated product",<br />
which includes surety and fidelity bonds, various types of insurance (life insurance, health,<br />
long-term care, title, property and casualty, annuities, disability, private mortgage,<br />
reinsurance (including retrocession) of any of the foregoing; and (ii) satisfy one prong of the<br />
"provider test" (which includes providers regulated by federal and state insurance authorities<br />
where the product is regulated as insurance under applicable federal or state law; federal,<br />
state and local governments and agencies where the product is regulated as insurance under<br />
applicable state or federal law; providers under statutorily authorized programs; certain<br />
reinsurers of products which satisfy the product test or are enumerated products; and certain<br />
non-admitted insurers). The Definition Rules state that the product test, the enumerated<br />
products and the provider test represent a non-exclusive safe harbor; that is, if a product does<br />
not satisfy the insurance safe harbor as set forth in the Definition Rules, such product will<br />
require further analysis of the facts and circumstances, including the form and substance of<br />
such product.<br />
(ii) Guarantees. The CFTC has stated that the definition of "swap"<br />
includes any guarantee of a swap, to the extent that a counterparty to the guaranteed swap<br />
67
would have recourse against the guarantor; i.e. a guarantee of a swap is a term of the swap.<br />
In contrast, the SEC will treat guarantees of security-based swaps as separate securities, which<br />
is consistent with the SEC’s historical approach to the treatment of guarantees of securities.<br />
Guarantees of security-based swaps will therefore be regulated as separate securities.<br />
(iii) Forward Contracts. The definition of "swap" as set forth in the<br />
Dodd-Frank Act excludes forward contracts with respect to nonfinancial commodities for<br />
deferred shipment or delivery, so long as the transaction is intended to be physically settled.<br />
In the Definition Rules, the CFTC has stated that it will interpret the forward contract exclusion<br />
in a manner consistent with its historical interpretation of the existing forward exclusion with<br />
respect to futures contracts. The CFTC’s historical interpretation has been that forward<br />
contracts with respect to nonfinancial commodities are commercial merchandising<br />
transactions, and therefore intent to deliver has historically been an element of the CFTC’s<br />
analysis of whether a contract is a forward contract. Accordingly, the CFTC will look at<br />
whether a contract is intended to be physically settled in order to determine if it is a forward<br />
contract of a swap.<br />
Whether a forward contract will lose its exclusion in the event of a "book-out"<br />
transaction has long been the subject of consideration under CFTC regulations. A "book-out"<br />
is a cancellation agreement entered into by two counterparties who have multiple, offsetting<br />
positions with each other in order to terminate their contracts and forego deliveries and<br />
instead to agree on payment of differences. The CFTC has stated that it will employ the Brent<br />
Interpretation, 4 which concluded that forward contracts for oil commodities retain their<br />
character as commercial merchandising transactions (and therefore as forward contracts)<br />
notwithstanding the practice of terminating delivery obligations via book-outs. The new<br />
interpretation effectively extends the Brent Interpretation to cover all nonfinancial<br />
commodities, rather than only oil commodities. Oral book outs will be permissible so long as<br />
they are followed in a commercially reasonable timeframe by a written or electronic<br />
confirmation.<br />
(iv) Consumer and Commercial Agreements, Contracts and<br />
Transactions. Various agreements, contracts and transactions entered into by consumers for<br />
personal, family or household purposes, which may have attributes of swaps or securitybased<br />
swaps, will not be considered swaps or security-based swaps. Such consumer<br />
agreements include real estate lease, purchase and mortgage transactions, product or service<br />
agreements for personal, family or household purposes, interest rate caps or locks or variable<br />
interest rate options for consumer loans or mortgages, consumer product warranties,<br />
extended service plans and buyer protection plans.<br />
Similarly, business agreements, contracts and transactions which are part of a<br />
business’ operations relating to acquisitions and sales of property, provisions of services,<br />
employment of individuals and other matters will not be considered swaps or security-based<br />
swaps.<br />
4 Statutory Interpretation Concerning Forward Transactions, 55 FR 39188 (Sept. 25, 1990).<br />
68
(v) Loan Participations. A loan participation is the transfer, by a<br />
lender to an investor, of a participation in the economic risks and benefits of all or a portion of<br />
a loan or commitment it has entered into with a borrower. Loan participations are not swaps<br />
or security-based swaps if the participation reflects a current or future direct or indirect<br />
ownership interest in the underlying loan or commitment. In evaluating this ownership<br />
interest, the Commissions have set out a four-part test: (1) the grantor of the participation<br />
must be a lender of or participant in the loan or commitment, (2) the aggregate participation<br />
amount does not exceed the principal amount of the loan or commitment, (3) the entire<br />
purchase price for the loan participation is paid in full when acquired and not financed and (4)<br />
the participation provides the participant all of the economic benefit and risk of the whole or<br />
part of the loan or commitment. Also, a loan participation does not have to be a "true<br />
participation" (that is, does not have to result in the underlying assets being totally isolated<br />
form a transferor’s creditors for U.S. bankruptcy law purposes) in order to fall outside the<br />
definition of swap or security-based swap.<br />
(vi) Foreign Exchange Products. The CEA as amended by the Dodd-<br />
Frank Act provides that foreign exchange forwards and foreign exchange swaps will be<br />
considered swaps unless the U.S. Treasury Secretary determines otherwise. In April 2011, the<br />
U.S. Treasury Secretary published a Notice of Proposed Determination to exempt foreign<br />
exchange forwards and foreign exchange from the definition of "swap". 5<br />
A "foreign exchange forward" is defined in the CEA as a transaction that solely involves<br />
the exchange of two different currencies on a specific future date at a fixed rate agreed upon<br />
on the inception of the contract covering exchange. A "foreign exchange swap" is defined in<br />
the CEA as a transaction that solely involves an exchange of 2 different currencies on a<br />
specific date at a fixed rate that is agreed upon on the inception of the contract covering the<br />
exchange; and a reverse exchange of the 2 currencies described above at a later date and at a<br />
fixed rate that is agreed upon on the inception of the contract covering the exchange. Even if<br />
foreign exchange forwards and foreign exchange swaps are excluded from the definition of<br />
swap, such transactions will still be subject to certain requirements for reporting swaps, and<br />
SDs and MSPs engaging in such transactions still would be subject to certain business<br />
conduct standards. Pending a final determination by the U.S. Treasury Secretary, the CFTC is<br />
including these products in the definition of swaps.<br />
Other foreign exchange products are not subject to a determination by the U.S.<br />
Treasury Secretary and therefore are considered swaps. These products include forward<br />
currency options, non-deliverable forwards, currency swaps and cross-currency swaps.<br />
The CFTC interprets the Dodd Frank Act to exclude bona fide spot transactions from<br />
the definition of "swap". Retail foreign currency options are also excluded.<br />
(vii) Forward Rate Agreements ("FRAs"). The Definition Rules state<br />
that FRAs will be deemed swaps. An FRA is an over-the-counter contract for a single cash<br />
5 "Determination of Foreign Exchange Swaps and Foreign Exchange Forwards Under the Commodity Exchange<br />
Act", issued by the Department of Treasury in April 2011.<br />
69
payment, due on the settlement date of a trade, based on a spot rate (determined by the<br />
parties) and a pre-specified forward rate. The notional amount itself is not exchanged. The<br />
Commissions determined that FRAs will be deemed swaps because they provide for a future<br />
payment based on the transfer of interest rate risk between the parties as opposed to<br />
transferring an ownership interest in any asset or liability. The CFTC distinguished FRAs from<br />
forward contracts, because FRAs do not involve nonfinancial commodities and are not<br />
commercial merchandising transactions.<br />
(viii) Combinations and Permutations of, or Options on, Swaps and<br />
Security-Based Swaps. The Dodd-Frank Act provides that any combination or permutation of,<br />
or option on, any agreement, contract, or transaction described in any of clauses (i) through<br />
(v) of the definition of swap is a swap or security-based swap, as applicable. The Commissions<br />
have interpreted this to mean that, among other things, an option on a swap (a "swaption")<br />
and a forward swap are swaps. The Commissions reserved the right to include other, more<br />
esoteric transactions in this category as swap products evolve.<br />
(ix) Contracts for Differences ("CFDs"). The Definition Rules clarified<br />
that CFDs, unless otherwise excluded, fall within the scope of the swap and security-based<br />
swap definitions, as applicable. A CFD is generally an agreement to exchange the difference<br />
in value of an underlying asset between the time at which a CFD position is established and<br />
the time at which it is terminated. If the value increases, the seller pays the buyer the<br />
difference; if the value decreases, the buyer pays the seller the difference.<br />
(x) Interpretive Rules. The Commissions have stated that regardless<br />
of whether agreements, contracts or transactions are labeled by the parties thereto as<br />
"swaps" or "security-based swaps", or whether the documentation used is the industry<br />
standard form typically used for swaps and security-based swaps, the key question for<br />
determination of swap status is whether the agreement, contract or transaction falls within<br />
the statutory definition of swap or security-based swap (though the documentation used may<br />
be a relevant factor).<br />
(xi) Relationship between Swaps and Security-Based Swaps. The<br />
determination whether a transaction is a swap or security-based swap should be made, based<br />
on the facts and circumstances of the transaction, prior to execution, but no later than when<br />
the parties offer to enter into the transaction. So long as the transaction is not amended by<br />
the parties, it will retain its characterization as a swap or a security-based swap for the life of<br />
the transaction, regardless of changes in external factors. The Commissions 6 have provided<br />
specific characterization guidance with respect to some derivative products discussed below.<br />
(A) Instruments Based on Interest Rate, other Monetary Rates or<br />
Yield. Instruments based solely on levels of certain interest rates or other monetary rates that<br />
are not themselves based on one or more securities are swaps. Except in the case of certain<br />
exempted securities, when one of the underlying references of an instrument is the yield of a<br />
6 As used in this article, "Commissions" refers to the SEC and CFTC, collectively.<br />
70
debt security, loan, or narrow-based security index, the instrument is a security-based swap.<br />
In this sense, "yield" means a proxy for the price or value of a debt security, loan, or narrowbased<br />
security index. However, when the only underlying reference involving securities is US<br />
Treasuries or other exempted securities, 7 the instrument is a swap.<br />
(B) Total Return Swaps ("TRS"). In a TRS, one counterparty (the<br />
seller) makes a payment that is based on the price appreciation and income from an<br />
underlying security or loan or security index, while the other counterparty (the buyer) makes<br />
a financing payment that is often based on variable interest rates (e.g., LIBOR), as well as a<br />
payment based on the price depreciation of the underlying reference. The "total return"<br />
consists of the price appreciation or depreciation, plus any interest or income payments.<br />
The Commissions have stated that where the TRS is based on single security or loan or<br />
narrow-based security index, the TRS would be a security-based swap. Where the TRS is<br />
based upon more than one loan, or a broader-based security index, the TRS is a swap.<br />
Generally, the use of a variable interest rate to determine the buyer’s payment obligations is<br />
incidental to the terms of the TRS and does not result in the characterization of the TRS as a<br />
mixed swap. However, where such payments incorporate additional elements that create<br />
additional interest rate or currency exposures unrelated to the financing of the TRS, or<br />
otherwise shift or limit risks related to the financing of the TRS, the TRS would be a mixed<br />
swap. Quanto equity swaps, which provide currency-protected exposure to a non-U.S. equity<br />
index, are subject to a similar analysis.<br />
(C) Security-Based Swaps Based on a Single Security or Loan<br />
and Single-Name Credit Default Swaps ("CDS"). A single-name CDS that is based on a single<br />
reference obligation will be considered a security-based swap because it is based on a single<br />
security or loan (or any interest therein or on the value thereof). Also, event triggered swap<br />
contracts, including CDS, are security-based swaps if the event relates to a single issuer of a<br />
security. The Commissions are also of the view that each transaction executed under an ISDA<br />
Master Agreement needs to be analyzed separately to determine whether it is a securitybased<br />
swap or a swap.<br />
(D) Futures. An instrument that is based on a futures contract<br />
will be either a swap or a security based swap, or both (i.e,. a mixed swap), depending on the<br />
nature of the futures contract, including the underlying reference of the futures contract.<br />
Generally, an instrument where the underlying reference is a security future is a securitybased<br />
swap. Similarly, an instrument where the underlying reference is a futures contract<br />
that is not a security future is a swap. There is a special rule for references consisting of<br />
certain foreign government debt securities which provides that such instruments will be<br />
swaps, rather than security-based swaps.<br />
(E) Narrow-Based Security Index. The definition of narrowbased<br />
security index is critical to the distinction between swaps and security-based swaps<br />
7 See footnote 3 above.<br />
71
which are based upon security indices. The Commissions have finalized a number of<br />
interpretations and rules addressing this complex definition, including such aspects as the<br />
treatment of index CDS, the definition of "index", and market movements which transform<br />
narrow-based security indices to broad-based securities indices, and vice versa. As a general<br />
rule, a narrow based security index is one which meets any one of the following four criteria:<br />
(1) it has nine or fewer component securities; (2) a component security comprises more than<br />
30% of the index’s weighting; (3) the five highest weighted component securities comprise in<br />
the aggregate more than 60% of the index’s weighting or (4) the average daily trading<br />
volume of the lowest weighted component securities comprising 25% of the index’s<br />
weighting is, generally, less than $50,000,000.<br />
(e) Security-Based Swap Agreements. Security-based swap agreements are<br />
swaps over which the CFTC has regulatory and enforcement authority but for which the SEC<br />
also has antifraud and certain other authority. A "security-based swap agreement" is a swap<br />
agreement 8 of which a material term is based on the price, yield, value or volatility of any<br />
security or any group or index of securities, including any interest therein, but does not<br />
include a security-based swap. The Commissions have stated that it is not possible to provide<br />
a bright line test to define security-based swap agreement, but it is possible to clarify certain<br />
types of swaps that are clearly within the definition of security-based swap agreement,<br />
including (i) a swap that is based on an index of securities that is not a narrow-based security<br />
index, (ii) an index CDS that is not based on a narrow-based security index or on the issuers of<br />
securities in a narrow-based security index, and (iii) a swap based on U.S. Treasury securities<br />
or on certain other exempted securities (other than municipal securities).<br />
2. Swap Dealers and Security Based Swap Dealers.<br />
(a) Definitions of Swap Dealer and Security Based Swap Dealer. Swap dealer<br />
is defined in the Dodd-Frank Act as anyone (i) who holds itself out as a dealer in swaps, (ii) is a<br />
market-maker in swaps, (iii) regularly engages in purchases and re-sales of swaps in the<br />
ordinary course of business for its own account, or (iv) engages in activities causing the<br />
person to be commonly known in the trade as a dealer or market maker in swaps. Securitybased<br />
swap dealer has a parallel definition with respect to dealings in security-based swaps.<br />
A person may be designated as a swap dealer for a single type or single class or category of<br />
swap or activities and not considered a swap dealer for others.<br />
The Dodd-Frank Act stated that the swap dealer definition does not include a person<br />
that enters into swaps for such person’s own account, either individually or in a fiduciary<br />
capacity, but not as a part of a regular business. The Dodd-Frank Act also directs the CFTC<br />
and SEC to promulgate rules establishing a de minimis exception.<br />
8 Section 206A of the Gramm‐Leach‐Bliley Act defines "swap agreements" as any individually negotiated contract,<br />
agreement, warrant, note, or option that is based, in whole or in part, on the value of, any interest in, or any<br />
quantitative measure or the occurrence of any event relating to, one or more commodities, securities, currencies,<br />
interest or other rates, indices, or other assets, but does not include any other identified banking product.<br />
72
Further, the statutory definition of swap dealer (but not the definition of securitybased<br />
swap dealer) provides that an insured depository institution ("IDI"), such as a bank, is to<br />
be considered a swap dealer to the extent it offers to enter into a swap with a customer in<br />
connection with originating a loan with that customer.<br />
The Definition Rules further define the terms swap dealer and security-based swap<br />
dealer and set out the exceptions to those definitions.<br />
(b) Dealer-Trader Distinction. The Definition Rules state that the dealertrader<br />
distinction, which already forms a basis for identifying which persons fall within the<br />
longstanding Exchange Act definition of "dealer", will generally provide a framework for<br />
interpreting the definition of swap dealer and security-based swap dealer. The SEC has<br />
previously noted that the dealer-trader distinction recognizes that dealers normally have a<br />
regular clientele, hold themselves out as buying or selling securities at a regular place of<br />
business, have a regular turnover of inventory (or participate in the sale or distribution of new<br />
issues, such as by acting as an underwriter), and generally provide liquidity services in<br />
transactions with investors (or in the case of dealers who are market-makers, for other<br />
professionals). Other non-exclusive factors that are relevant for distinguishing between<br />
dealers and non-dealers can include receipt of customer property and the furnishing of<br />
incidental advice in connection with transactions. The Commissions have created a list of<br />
dealing activities. In addition, the Commissions have clarified that "market making" means<br />
routinely standing ready to enter into swaps at the request or demand of a counterparty<br />
(routinely being more frequently than occasionally, though there is no requirement that the<br />
person do so continuously). Likewise, the Commissions have created a list of activities that<br />
constitute market making.<br />
The Commissions recognize that the dealer-trader distinction needs to be adapted to<br />
apply to swap activities in light of the special characteristics of swaps and the differences<br />
between the statutory definitions of dealer and swap dealer: (i) because swap markets are<br />
less active than most securities markets, the concept of "regularity" will be relative to the<br />
swap dealer’s activities as a portion of total market activity; (ii) since each counterparty to a<br />
swap is in essence the "issuer" of that instrument, the concept of maintaining an inventory of<br />
securities is inapposite to the context of swaps, and moreover the concept of two-sided<br />
markets would generally be less relevant for identifying swap dealers than dealers; (iii) since<br />
swaps are thus far not significantly traded on exchanges or other trading systems, the<br />
concept of what it means to make a market must be construed flexibly; and (iv) the ongoing<br />
mutuality of swap obligations in swap transactions leads to the characterization of swap<br />
parties as "counterparties" rather than "customers".<br />
(c) Indicia of Holding Oneself Out as a Dealer in Swaps or Being Commonly<br />
Known in the Trade as a Dealer in Swaps. In the release finalizing the Definition Rules, the<br />
Commissions set out various indicia of holding oneself out as a dealer in swaps or being<br />
commonly known in the trade as a dealer in swaps; however, the CFTC and SEC stated that<br />
these should not be considered in a vacuum, but should instead be considered in a facts and<br />
circumstances analysis and in the context of all activities of the swap participant. The indicia<br />
73
are not conclusive, and could be countered by other factors indicating that the person is not a<br />
swap dealer. These indicia include: (i) contacting potential counterparties to solicit interest in<br />
swaps; (ii) developing new types of swaps and informing potential counterparties of the<br />
availability of such swaps; (iii) membership in a swap association in a category reserved for<br />
dealers; (iv) providing marketing materials that describe the types of swaps that one is willing<br />
to enter into with other parties; or (v) generally expressing a willingness to offer or provide a<br />
range of financial products that would include swaps. The Commissions also state that the<br />
test for being "commonly known in the trade" as a swap dealer may appropriately reflect,<br />
among other factors, the perspective of persons with substantial experience with and<br />
knowledge of swap markets. The indicia were not codified in the Definition Rules in order to<br />
allow for a flexible facts and circumstances analysis.<br />
(d) Market Making. The Definition Rules set out four factors indicative of<br />
market making in swaps; however this list is not exhaustive: (i) quoting bid or offer prices,<br />
rates or other financial terms for swaps on an exchange; (ii) responding to requests made<br />
directly or indirectly through an interdealer broker, by potential counterparties for bid or offer<br />
prices, rates or similar terms for bilaterally negotiated swaps; (iii) placing limit orders for<br />
swaps; or (iv) receiving compensation for acting in a market maker capacity on an organized<br />
exchange or trading system for swaps. The Commissions also stated that the dealer-trader<br />
interpretive framework should be applied to the market maker analysis, thus in applying the<br />
four factors described above, it is useful to consider whether the person is seeking, through<br />
presence in the market, compensation for providing liquidity, compensation through spreads<br />
or fees, or other compensation not attributable to changes in the value of the swaps it enters<br />
into. Market makers may make either a two-way or one-way market in swaps.<br />
(e) Exception for Activities Not Part of a "Regular Business". The Definition<br />
Rules clarify that "regular business" and "ordinary course of business" are synonymous for<br />
purposes of the definition of swap dealer. The Commissions interpret these phrases to focus<br />
on the activities of a person that are usual and normal in the person’s course of business and<br />
identifiable as a swap dealing business. It is not necessarily relevant whether the person<br />
conducts its swap-related activities through a dedicated subsidiary, division, department or<br />
trading desk, or whether such activities are the person’s "primary" business or an "ancillary"<br />
business. The determination whether a person regularly enters into swaps as an ordinary<br />
course of business will be a facts and circumstances determination and the Definition Rules<br />
list several factors that the regulators will consider: (i) entering into swaps with the purpose<br />
of satisfying the business or risk management needs of the counterparty (as opposed to<br />
entering into swaps to accommodate one's own demand or desire to participate in a<br />
particular market); (ii) maintaining a separate profit and loss statement reflecting the results<br />
of swap activity or treating swap activity as a separate profit center; or (iii) having staff and<br />
resources allocated to dealer-type activities with counterparties, including activities relating<br />
to credit analysis, customer onboarding, document negotiation, confirmation generation,<br />
requests for novations and amendments, exposure monitoring and collateral calls, covenant<br />
monitoring, and reconciliation.<br />
74
(f) Hedging Activity. Swaps and security-based swaps entered into to<br />
hedge commercial risk or otherwise to hedge risks unrelated to activities that constitute<br />
dealing under the dealer-trader distinction will not be considered swap dealing activity. The<br />
CFTC has stated that it will use its definition of bona fide hedging and will focus on the<br />
purpose for which the person enters into a swap, as opposed to the effect or consequences of<br />
the swap. The SEC has made this a final rule, while the CFTC has made this an interim final<br />
rule, stating that since the manner in which persons negotiate, execute and use swaps is likely<br />
to evolve in response to the requirements of the Dodd-Frank Act, crafting exclusions from the<br />
swap dealer definition at this time is inappropriate.<br />
The determination of whether a person is a swap dealer will not consider a swap that<br />
the person enters into if (A) the person enters into the swap for the purpose of offsetting or<br />
mitigating the person’s price risks that arise from the potential change in the value of one or<br />
several (x) assets that the person owns, produces, manufactures, processes or merchandises,<br />
or anticipates owning, producing, manufacturing, processing or merchandising; (y) liabilities<br />
that the person owns or anticipates incurring; or (z) services that the person provides,<br />
purchases or anticipates providing or purchasing; (B) the swap represents a substitute for<br />
transactions made or to be made or positions taken or to be taken by the person at a later<br />
time in a physical marketing channel; (C) the swap is economically appropriate to the<br />
reduction of the person’s risks in the conduct and management of a commercial enterprise;<br />
(D) the swap is entered into in accordance with sound commercial practices; and (E) the<br />
person does not enter into the swap in connection with activity structured to evade<br />
designation as a swap dealer.<br />
(g) Swaps Entered Into by Persons Registered as Floor Traders. The Dodd-<br />
Frank Act amended the CEA definition of "floor trader" to encompass activities involving<br />
swaps, and so in order to avoid duplicative regulation, if floor traders engage in swaps in their<br />
capacity as floor traders they will not be considered swap dealers; provided, that the person:<br />
(i) is registered with the CFTC as a floor trader; (ii) enters into swaps solely with proprietary<br />
funds for the trader’s own account on or subject to the rules of a designated contract market<br />
or swap execution facility, and submits each swap for clearing with a designated clearing<br />
organization; (iii) is not an affiliated person of a registered swap dealer; (iv) does not directly<br />
or through an affiliated person negotiate the terms of swap agreements, other than the price<br />
and quantity or to participate in a request for quote process; (v) does not directly or through<br />
an affiliated person offer or provide swap clearing services to third parties; (vi) does not<br />
directly or through an affiliated person enter into swaps that would qualify as hedging<br />
physical positions or hedging or mitigating commercial risk (with the exceptions of swaps<br />
executed opposite a counterparty for which the transaction would qualify as a bona fide<br />
hedging transaction); (vii) does not participate in any market making program offered by a<br />
designated contract market or swap execution facility; and (viii) complies with the record<br />
keeping and risk management requirements of the CFTC with respect to each such swap as if<br />
it were a swap dealer.<br />
(h) Treatment of Insured Depository Institutions. The statutory definition of<br />
swap dealer excludes an IDI to the extent it offers to enter into a swap with a customer in<br />
75
connection with originating a loan with that customer. This exclusion does not appear in the<br />
statutory definition of security-based swap dealer.<br />
In the Definition Rules, the CFTC clarified that only swap activity with a customer in<br />
connection with originating a loan are part of the exclusion, not all swaps entered into<br />
between the IDI and a borrower at any time during the duration of the loan. In order to fall<br />
within this exclusion, the following conditions must be satisfied:<br />
(i) the term of the swap between the IDI and the borrower may not<br />
extend beyond the termination of the loan;<br />
(ii) the swap must be connected to the financial terms of the loan or<br />
is required by the IDI’s loan underwriting criteria to be in place as a condition of the loan in<br />
order to hedge commodity price risks incidental to the borrower’s business;<br />
(iii)<br />
the loan cannot be a sham or synthetic loan;<br />
(iv) the IDI must (directly or indirectly such as by purchasing a<br />
participation) be the source of funds for at least 10% of the maximum principal amount;<br />
(v) the IDI must enter into the swap with the borrower no more<br />
than 90 days before or 180 days after any transfer of principal to the borrower from the IDI<br />
pursuant to the loan; and<br />
(vi) the aggregate notional amount of all swaps entered into by the<br />
IDI and the borrower cannot exceed the notional principal amount of the loan at any time<br />
during the term of the loan.<br />
(i) Application of Dealer Definitions to Legal Persons and Inter-Affiliate Swaps<br />
and Security-Based Swaps. The Commissions have clarified that they interpret the word<br />
"person" in the swap dealer and security-based dealer definitions to mean a legal person,<br />
which means that a legal person will be deemed to be performing dealing activities even if<br />
those activities are limited to a trading desk or discrete business unit. The Commissions also<br />
clarified that the dealer analysis will not apply to swaps between majority-owned affiliates.<br />
Neither will the analysis be applied between a cooperative and its members so long as the<br />
swaps in question are reported to the relevant swap data repository and are subject to the<br />
cooperative’s risk management policies and procedures.<br />
(j) De Minimis Exception. Persons who engage in a de minimis quantity of<br />
swap/security-based swap dealing are not swap dealers/security-based swap dealers.<br />
A person will not be deemed to be a swap dealer as a result of swap dealing activity<br />
that meets the following conditions: over the preceding 12 months: (i) an aggregate gross<br />
notional amount of no more than $3 billion (subject to a phase-in level of $8 billion); and (iii)<br />
76
an aggregate gross notional amount of no more than $25 million with regard to all securitybased<br />
swaps in which the counterparty is a special entity 9 .<br />
A person will not be deemed to be a security-based swap dealer as a result of securitybased<br />
swap dealing activity that meets the following conditions: over the preceding 12<br />
months: (i) an aggregate gross notional amount of no more than $3 billion (subject to a<br />
phase-in level of $8 billion) with regard to credit default swaps that constitute security-based<br />
swaps; (ii) an aggregate gross notional amount of no more than $150 million (subject to a<br />
phase-in level of $400 million) with regard to all other security-based swaps; and (iii) an<br />
aggregate gross notional amount of no more than $25 million with regard to all securitybased<br />
swaps in which the counterparty is a special entity.<br />
3. Major Swap Participants and Major Security-Based Swap Participants.<br />
(a) Definition of Major Swap Participants and Majority Security-Based Swap<br />
Participants. Major swap participants are defined in the Dodd-Frank Act as any person who is<br />
not a swap dealer and (i) who maintains a substantial position in swaps for any of the major<br />
swap categories (excluding positions held for hedging or mitigating commercial risk or<br />
maintained by any employee benefit plan for the primary purpose of hedging or mitigating<br />
risk associated with the operation of the plan), (ii) whose outstanding swaps create<br />
substantial counterparty exposure that could have serious adverse effect on the financial<br />
stability of the U.S. banking system or financial markets, or (iii) who is a financial entity that is<br />
highly leveraged and maintains a substantial position in outstanding derivatives in any major<br />
swap category. There is a parallel definition for security-based swap participants with respect<br />
to dealings in swap-based securities.<br />
(b) Major Swaps. The Definition Rules establish 4 "major" categories of<br />
swaps as rate swaps, credit swaps, equity swaps and other commodity swaps, and 2 "major"<br />
categories of security-based swaps as debt security-based swaps and other security-based<br />
swaps.<br />
(c) Substantial Position. The guiding principle set forth in the Definition<br />
Rules for determining "substantial position" is a focus on identifying persons whose large<br />
swap and security-based swap positions pose market risks that are significant enough that it<br />
would be "prudent" to regulate those persons.<br />
In order for a person to have a "substantial position" in a major swaps or securitybased<br />
swaps category, it must have (i) a daily average aggregate uncollateralized outward<br />
exposure of at least $1 billion (or $3 billion for the rate swap category), or (ii) a daily average<br />
aggregate uncollateralized outward exposure plus daily average aggregate potential outward<br />
exposure of $2 billion (or $6 billion for the rate swap category).<br />
9 "Special entity" means (i) a federal agency, (ii) a state, state agency, city, county, municipality, other political<br />
subdivision of a state, or any instrumentality, department or corporation of or established by a state or political<br />
subdivision of a state, (iii) any employee benefit plan subject to ERISA, (iv) any government plan as defined by<br />
ERISA, and (v) any endowment.<br />
77
"Aggregate uncollateralized outward exposure" is defined as the sum of those<br />
uncollateralized amounts over all counterparties with which the person has entered into<br />
swaps or security-based swaps in a major category.<br />
(d) Hedging or Mitigating Commercial Risk. The first test of the major<br />
participant definitions excludes positions held for hedging or mitigating commercial risk from<br />
the substantial position analysis. The exclusion is predicated on the principle that swaps<br />
necessary to the conduct or management of a person’s commercial activities should not be<br />
included in the calculation of substantial position. The Definition Rules clarify that this<br />
exclusion applies regardless of the nature of the entity involved (e.g., whether the entity is<br />
financial, such as a bank) or the organizational status of the entity involved (e.g., whether the<br />
entity is a governmental or non-profit entity). The Definition Rules also clarify that the<br />
exclusion is available to positions that hedge "financial" or "balance sheet" risk and extends to<br />
hedging the risks of a person’s majority-owned affiliates. Whether a person hedges or<br />
mitigates commercial risk should be determined by the facts and circumstances at the time of<br />
entry into the swap and should take into account overall hedging and risk mitigation<br />
strategies of such person. However, a swap cannot be held for the purpose of speculation,<br />
investing or trading and its terms must be economically appropriate for managing risk.<br />
(e) Exclusion for Positions Held by Certain ERISA Plans. The first test of the<br />
major participant definitions excludes hedging by ERISA-covered plans 10 . The Definition<br />
Rules clarify the scope of this exclusion, stating that the swap positions will be deemed to<br />
have a primary purpose of hedging or mitigating risks directly associated with the operation<br />
of an ERISA plan of the applicable type when those positions are intended to reduce<br />
disruption or costs in connection with, among others, the anticipated inflows or outflows of<br />
plan assets, interest rate risk and changes in portfolio management or strategies. In addition<br />
the Definition Rules clarified that positions "maintained" by an ERISA plan include those in<br />
which such a plan is a counterparty and also positions in which the counterparty is a trust or<br />
pooled vehicle that holds plan assets.<br />
(f) Substantial Counterparty Exposure. The second test of the major<br />
participant definitions encompasses persons whose outstanding swaps or security-based<br />
swaps create substantial counterparty exposure. Substantial counterparty exposure will be<br />
determined based on the same current uncollateralized exposure and potential future<br />
exposure tests that are used to identify "substantial position". However, it should be noted<br />
that the substantial counterparty exposure analysis addresses all of person’s swap positions in<br />
the aggregate, rather than being limited to positions in a "major" category. It should also be<br />
noted that substantial counterparty exposure analysis does not exclude commercial hedging<br />
risk or ERISA hedging positions.<br />
10 "ERISA" is the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, which is a federal law that was enacted to<br />
protect the interests of employee benefit plan participants and their beneficiaries. ERISA establishes minimum<br />
standards for pension plans in private industry and provides for extensive rules on the federal income tax effects of<br />
transactions associated with employee benefit plans.<br />
78
For a major swap participant the thresholds for substantial counterparty exposure are<br />
current uncollateralized exposure of $5 billion or current uncollateralized exposure and future<br />
exposure of $8 billion across all of the person’s swap positions. For a major security-based<br />
swap participant, the thresholds are $2 billion and $4 billion, respectively.<br />
(g) Highly Leveraged and Financial Entity. For purposes of the third test of<br />
the major participant definitions, a "financial entity" includes commodity pools, private funds,<br />
ERISA plans, and persons predominantly engaged in activities that are in the business of<br />
banking or financial in nature, as well as certain dealers or major participants. "Highly<br />
leveraged" generally means a ratio of liabilities to equity in excess of 12 to 1.<br />
4. Eligible Contract Participant ("ECP"). 11<br />
The Dodd-Frank Act makes it unlawful for a person that is not an ECP to enter into a<br />
swap other than on or subject to the rules of a designated contract market (and in the case of<br />
a security-based swap, a national securities exchange registered with the SEC). The Dodd-<br />
Frank Act also amended the CEA definition of ECP to provide that (i) ECP does not include (i) a<br />
commodity pool in which any participant is not itself an ECP, (ii) raising the monetary<br />
threshold that governmental entities may use to qualify as ECPs, in certain situations, from<br />
$25 million in investments owned and invested on a discretionary basis to $50 million, (iii)<br />
replacing the "total asset" standard for individuals to qualify as an ECP with an "amounts<br />
invested on a discretionary basis" standard.<br />
In addition, the Definition Rules added the terms swap dealer, security-based swap<br />
dealer, major swap participant and major security-based swap participant to the definition of<br />
ECP.<br />
5. Effective Dates and Compliance Dates.<br />
The Definition Rules for the product definitions become effective on October 12, <strong>2012</strong>,<br />
and the compliance date for these rules will also be October 12, <strong>2012</strong> (with certain<br />
exceptions).<br />
The Definition Rules for the player definitions became effective on July 23, <strong>2012</strong><br />
(except that the effective date for certain commodity pools that are deemed eligible contract<br />
participants will be December 31, <strong>2012</strong>). There are various phase-in periods for compliance<br />
11 "Eligible Contract Participant" is defined in Section 1(a)(12) of the CEA and generally means: (i) financial<br />
institutions, (ii) insurance companies, (iii) investment companies regulated under the Investment Company Act of<br />
1940, (iv) certain commodity pools with $5 million or more of assets, (v) certain organizations with, generally, $10<br />
million or more of assets, (vi) ERISA plans with $5 million or more of assets, (vii) certain governmental entities with<br />
over $50 million or more in investments, (viii) certain broker‐dealers and investment banks, (ix) futures<br />
commission merchants, (x) floor brokers, (xi) an individual with, generally, $10 million or more of assets invested<br />
on a discretionary basis or $5 million invested on a discretionary basis and who enters into the agreement,<br />
contract or transaction in order to manage the risk associated with an asset owned or liability incurred, or<br />
reasonably likely to be owned or incurred, by the individual, and (xii) certain brokers and investment advisers.<br />
79
y persons that will be deemed swap dealers/security-based swap dealers, major swap<br />
participants/major security-based swap participants and eligible contract participants.<br />
III.<br />
REPORTING AND RECORDKEEPING OF SWAP TRANSACTION DATA; REGISTRATION AND<br />
REGULATION OF SWAP DATA REPOSITORIES<br />
The Dodd-Frank Act requires every swap transaction (whether cleared or uncleared) to<br />
be recorded, and to be reported in two ways: (i) on a comprehensive basis to a data<br />
warehouse known as a swap data repository (SDR), which information will be treated<br />
confidentially but made available to regulators and (ii) on a selective basis (i.e. price, volume<br />
and asset type, but excluding the names of the parties) to the public. SDRs will play a key role<br />
in the dissemination of swap transaction data and will themselves be subject to regulation.<br />
The CFTC has enacted regulation regarding reporting and recordkeeping of swap<br />
transaction data and registration and regulation of SDRs, while the SEC has proposed rules<br />
but has not yet enacted final regulation.<br />
CFTC REGULATION<br />
1. Reporting and Recordkeeping Requirements.<br />
The fundamental goal of the CFTC’s rulemaking regarding reporting and<br />
recordkeeping requirements for swap transactions is to ensure that complete data<br />
concerning all swaps subject to the CFTC’s jurisdiction is maintained in SDRs, where it would<br />
be available to the CFTC and other financial regulators for fulfillment of their various<br />
regulatory mandates, including systemic risk mitigation, market monitoring and market<br />
abuse prevention.<br />
(a) Records Required; Retention Periods. Sophisticated parties (including<br />
SEFs, designated contract markets ("DCMs"), derivatives clearing organizations ("DCOs"), swap<br />
dealers and major swap participants) will be required to keep full, complete and systematic<br />
records of all activities relating to their business with respect to swaps. Non-swap<br />
dealer/major swap participant counterparties will be subject to lesser recordkeeping<br />
requirements; they must only keep full and complete records relating to swaps to which they<br />
are counterparties, as opposed to their entire business relating to swaps. All such records<br />
must be kept throughout the existence of the swap and for 5 years following final termination<br />
of the swap. Sophisticated parties must keep the data readily accessible (meaning retrievable<br />
in real time or at least on the same day) throughout the life of the swap and for the first two of<br />
the five years of the post-termination retention period, while non-swap dealer/major swap<br />
participant counterparties must make the records retrievable within 5 business days through<br />
the life of the swap and the post-termination retention period. SDRs are subject to additional<br />
requirements, as their records must be (i) readily accessible and available to the CFTC via real<br />
time electronic access during the life of the swap and for five years thereafter and (ii) kept in<br />
archival storage for an additional 10 year period, during which time they must be retrievable<br />
by the SDR within 3 business days.<br />
80
(b) Data To Be Reported. Swap data must be reported to a registered SDR<br />
at the creation of the swap and over the existence of the swap. Continuing data regarding a<br />
swap must be reported to the same SDR that received the initial creation data.<br />
(i) Creation Data. In connection with the creation of the swap, two<br />
categories of data must be reported: primary economic terms data ("PET" data), which is all of<br />
the terms of the swap verified or matched by the counterparties at or shortly after the<br />
execution of the swap; and confirmation data, which is all of the terms of a swap matched and<br />
agreed upon by the counterparties in confirming the swap.<br />
Initial creation data will be reported to an SDR by the registered entity or reporting<br />
counterparty that the CFTC believes has the easiest and fastest access to the data required.<br />
Counterparties to swaps are generally subject to reporting requirements; however: (i) if only<br />
one counterparty is a swap dealer or major swap participant, such swap dealer or major swap<br />
participant will be the reporting party; (ii) if one counterparty is a swap dealer and the other a<br />
major swap participant, the swap dealer will be the reporting party; (iii) if both counterparties<br />
are swap dealers or major swap participants, they must agree between themselves who will<br />
be the reporting party; (iv) if neither counterparty is a swap dealer or major swap participant,<br />
but one of them is a financial entity (as defined in the CEA), the financial entity will be the<br />
reporting party; (v) if neither counterparty is a swap dealer or major swap participant, but one<br />
of the counterparties is a U.S. person and the other is not, then the U.S. person will be the<br />
reporting party; and (vi) if neither counterparty is a swap dealer or major swap participant, a<br />
financial entity or a non-U.S. person, they must agree between themselves who will be the<br />
reporting party. SEFs, DCMs and DCOs will also participate in the reporting process,<br />
depending upon where the trade occurs and whether it is cleared. For example, if a swap is<br />
executed on an SEF or DCM and not cleared, the swap dealer or major swap participant must<br />
report continuation data and daily valuation data (as discussed below), while the DCM/SEF<br />
will report the creation data. If a swap is executed on an SEF or DCM and is cleared, then the<br />
swap dealer or major swap participant must report only daily valuation data, while the<br />
DCM/SEF will report the creation data and the DCO will report continuation data.<br />
If there is no SDR that will accept swap data for a certain swap transaction (e.g., where<br />
a novel product does not fit into any existing asset class), the reporting counterparty must<br />
report data regarding such swap to the CFTC.<br />
(A) Mixed Swaps; Multi-Asset Swaps. Mixed swaps must be<br />
reported to both an SDR registered with the CFTC and one registered with the SEC (a dual<br />
registered SDR is acceptable, but not required). Multi-asset swaps must be reported to a<br />
single SDR accepting swaps data for the asset class determined by the reporting counterparty<br />
to be the first or primary asset.<br />
(B) International Swaps. International swaps (that is, swaps<br />
that may be required by U.S. law and the law of another jurisdiction to be reported both to an<br />
SDR registered with the CFTC and to a different trade repository registered with the other<br />
jurisdiction), must be reported to a U.S. registered SDR, together with the identity of the<br />
81
foreign trade repository and the swap identifier used by that foreign trade repository for that<br />
swap.<br />
(ii) Continuation Data. Registered entities and reporting<br />
counterparties must report continuation data in a manner sufficient to ensure that the<br />
information in the SDR concerning the swap is current and accurate, and includes all changes<br />
to the PET of the swap. The CFTC has left it to the SDR, registered entities and reporting<br />
counterparties to choose the method of reporting. Relevant changes must be reported on<br />
the same day they occur (for non-swap dealers/major swap participants, during the 1-year<br />
phase-in period, they have 2 business days to report, and after the phase-in period, they must<br />
report no later than the next business day). Corporate events of both the reporting and nonreporting<br />
counterparties must also be reported.<br />
Valuation data for each swap must be reported daily. For cleared swaps in all asset<br />
classes, DCOs will be the sole reporters of continuation data, other than valuation data, which<br />
will be reported daily by both the DCO and the reporting counterparty (unless the reporting<br />
party is not a swap dealer or major swap participant, in which case only the DCO will report<br />
valuation data). For uncleared swaps, the reporting party must report the daily valuation<br />
information (regardless of whether the reporting party is a swap dealer or major swap<br />
participant).<br />
(c) Third-Party Facilitation of Swap Data Reporting. Registered entities and<br />
reporting counterparties may contract with third-party service providers to facilitate<br />
reporting, but, nonetheless, remain fully responsible for the reporting required.<br />
(d) Voluntary Reporting. Voluntary supplemental reporting by nonreporting<br />
counterparties is permitted.<br />
(e) Format of Reported Data. The CFTC rules do not impose a uniform<br />
reporting format or a single data standard. However, SDRs must maintain and transmit all<br />
data reported to it in a format acceptable to the CFTC.<br />
(f) Compliance Dates. The compliance dates for the CFTC regulations<br />
regarding reporting and recordkeeping of swap data are: (i) for credit swaps and interest rate<br />
swaps, October 12, <strong>2012</strong>; (ii) for equity swaps, foreign exchange swaps and other commodity<br />
swaps, January 10, 2013; and (iii) for non-swap dealers/major swap participants, April 10,<br />
2013.<br />
2. Reporting and Recordkeeping Requirements for Pre-Enactment Swaps<br />
The above-summarized rules regarding reporting and recordkeeping (the "R&R Rules")<br />
apply only to swaps executed on or after the compliance dates for such rules. The CFTC<br />
adopted separate rules for recordkeeping and reporting of "historical swaps". Historical<br />
Swaps include "pre-enactment swaps", which are swaps entered into before the enactment of<br />
the Dodd-Frank Act on July 21, 2010 but not terminated or expired as of that date, and<br />
"transition swaps", which are swaps entered into between July 21, 2010 and October 12, <strong>2012</strong>.<br />
82
On October 14, 2010 the CFTC adopted an interim final rule related to recordkeeping<br />
and reporting for pre-enactment swaps, and on December 17, 2010 the CFTC also adopted an<br />
interim final rule related to recordkeeping and reporting for transition swaps. These interim<br />
final rules required market participants to retain information about swap transactions for<br />
future reporting.<br />
(a)<br />
Recordkeeping for Historical Swaps.<br />
(i) Historical Swaps Terminated or Expired Before April 25, 2011.<br />
For historical swaps terminated or expired before April 25, 2011, all counterparties to those<br />
swaps will be required to retain information and documents in their possession on or after the<br />
date of the relevant interim final rule. The retention period is the life of the swap plus 5 years.<br />
The data must be retrievable within 5 business days throughout the retention period.<br />
(ii) Historical Swaps Not Terminated or Expired Before April 25,<br />
2011. For historical swaps not terminated or expired before April 25, 2011, all counterparties<br />
will be required to retain (i) minimum PET data (as specified by CFTC regulations) in such<br />
party’s possession on April 25, 2011, (ii) records of confirmation terms and master or credit<br />
support agreements and modifications in such party’s possession on April 25, 2011, and (iii)<br />
and all records required under the R&R rules, to the extent such information is created or<br />
becomes available after the compliance date for the historical swap reporting rules (see<br />
below). The retention period is the life of the swap plus 5 years. The data must be readily<br />
accessible via real time electronic access for the life of the swap plus 2 years, and then<br />
retrievable within 3 business days through the remainder of the retention period (for nonswap<br />
dealer/major swap participant counterparties, the date must only be retrievable within<br />
5 business days throughout the retention period).<br />
(b) Reporting of Historical Swaps. Counterparties to historical swaps must<br />
report to SDRs minimum PET data, execution dates (if known), as well as whether one or both<br />
of the counterparties is a swap dealer or major swap participant. Counterparties to uncleared<br />
swaps will also be required to report continuation data (to the same extent required under<br />
the R&R Rules) for changes occurring after the compliance dates for the historical/transition<br />
swap rules. The reporting counterparty will be determined using the same hierarchy<br />
established by the R&R Rules.<br />
(c) Compliance Dates. The compliance dates for recordkeeping and<br />
reporting for historical swaps will be the same as those for the R&R Rules.<br />
3. Registration and Regulation of SDRs<br />
Under the Dodd-Frank Act, SDRs are intended to play a key role in enhancing<br />
transparency of the swap market by retaining complete records of swap transactions and<br />
providing effective access to those records to the relevant authorities and to the public. The<br />
SDRs also have the potential to reduce operational risk and enhance efficiency by maintaining<br />
data that is accessible by both counterparties to a swap.<br />
83
(a) Registration of SDRs. The Dodd-Frank Act required the creation of SDRs,<br />
which must be registered with and subject to regulation by the CFTC. The CFTC has enacted<br />
rules setting forth registration procedures for SDRs, which require an applicant to submit to<br />
the CFTC detailed information about its business, the asset classes it will serve, its financial<br />
resources, technological capabilities and accessibility of its services.<br />
(b) Duties of Registered SDRs. The CFTC has enacted minimum duties that<br />
an SDR is required to perform to become registered and maintain registration: (i) accept<br />
swap data as prescribed by the CFTC; (ii) confirm with both counterparties to a swap the<br />
accuracy of the data; (iii) maintain the data submitted; (iv) provide the CFTC and other U.S.<br />
and foreign regulators with access to the data; (v) comply with the public reporting<br />
requirements, (vi) establish automated systems for monitoring, screening and analyzing swap<br />
data; (vii) maintain confidentiality and privacy of all swap data; (viii) maintain sufficient<br />
financial resources; (ix) establish emergency data recovery plans; and (x) provide fair and<br />
open access, and fees and charges that are equitable and non-discriminatory.<br />
(c) Core Principles Applicable to SDRs. The Dodd-Frank Act amended the<br />
CEA to establish four statutory core principles that all SDRs must comply with in order to<br />
register and maintain registration. The CFTC has since clarified these core principles through<br />
regulation:<br />
(i) Anti-trust considerations. Unless necessary or appropriate to<br />
achieve the purposes of the Dodd-Frank Act, an SDR must avoid adopting any rule or taking<br />
any action that results in any unreasonable restraint on trade, or imposing any material anticompetitive<br />
burden on trading, clearing or reporting swaps.<br />
(ii) Transparent Governance Arrangements. SDRs must have<br />
transparent governance arrangements. SDRs must publicly describe its decision-making<br />
process (including board member nominations and assignments), its significant decisions<br />
implicating public interest (e.g., decisions regarding pricing, access to data, and the use of<br />
otherwise protected customer information and trade secrets), and how its board considers an<br />
"independent perspective"; i.e. a viewpoint that is impartial regarding competitive,<br />
commercial or industry concerns and contemplates the effect of a decision on all constituents<br />
involved. In addition, the compensation of non-executive board members may not be linked<br />
to the business performance of the SDR.<br />
(iii) Conflicts of Interest. SDRs must establish and implement internal<br />
rules to minimize conflicts of interest and establish a process for resolving conflicts that arise.<br />
(iv) Additional Principles. The CFTC was given rule-making authority<br />
to establish additional duties for SDRs and the CFTC has created 3 duties to further minimize<br />
conflicts of interest, protect data, ensure compliance and guaranty the safety and security of<br />
SDRs:<br />
(A) SDRs must maintain financial resources sufficient to cover<br />
operating expenses for at least 1 year (calculated on a rolling basis), including unencumbered<br />
84
liquid assets equal to at least 6 months' operating costs. Financial resources must be<br />
separately dedicated for this purpose and if the SDRs’ financial resources are not sufficiently<br />
liquid, committed lines of credit may be counted.<br />
(B) SDRs must furnish to market participants a disclosure<br />
document setting forth the risks and costs associated with using the services of SDR, which<br />
must include, among other things, the SDR’s criteria for providing others with access to the<br />
data maintained by the SDR, a description of policies and procedures regarding safeguarding<br />
data and confidentiality, and a description of all services provided by the SDR.<br />
(C) SDRs must provide fair and open access to all market<br />
participants. Fees must be equitable (e.g., no volume discounts may be offered) and ancillary<br />
services may not be bundled with mandated regulatory services.<br />
(d) Use of Data; Confidentiality. CFTC rules prohibit SDRs from using swap<br />
data for commercial purposes (other than data that is publicly disseminated), unless the<br />
persons submitting the data consent to such use. SDRs must have policies and procedures to<br />
protect privacy and confidentiality of all swap information they receive that is not subject to<br />
real-time public reporting requirements.<br />
(e) Chief Compliance Officer. An SDR must have a chief compliance officer<br />
who is appointed by its board of directors and is not a member of its legal department or its<br />
general counsel. The chief compliance officer must report directly to the board or senior<br />
officer of the SDR and can only be removed with board approval. The CFTC has enacted rules<br />
that outline the CCO's major duties, which include taking reasonable steps to ensure<br />
compliance with rules and regulations and developing procedures for corrective actions for<br />
noncompliance.<br />
(f) Compliance Dates. The registration and regulation of SDRs rules became<br />
effective on October 31, 2011. The CFTC noted, however, that while SDRs can register, they<br />
will not otherwise be fully operational on such effective date but instead will require a<br />
compliance period based on the R&R rules and the real-time reporting rules.<br />
SEC PROPOSED RULES<br />
The SEC proposed rules on November 19, 2010 regarding reporting and<br />
recordkeeping of security-based swap transaction data and the regulation of SDRs (the "R&R<br />
Proposed Rules") which are very similar to the regulations enacted by the CFTC. Some of the<br />
differences include: (i) the SEC proposes to mandate a uniform electronic format for<br />
reporting of security-based swap data (unlike the CFTC, which has left the format and<br />
reporting methodology to the SDRs); (ii) regarding historical security-based swaps, the SEC<br />
proposes to collect data only for those security-based swaps that have not expired prior to<br />
the date of enactment of the final historical swap data reporting rules; and (iii) the SEC<br />
proposes to make SDRs the sole disseminators of real-time public security-based swap data<br />
85
(as opposed to the CFTC rules which permit certain third-party service providers to have<br />
public dissemination responsibility).<br />
The Dodd-Frank Act mandated that in enacting its real-time reporting rules, the SEC<br />
take into account whether the public disclosure will materially reduce market liquidity. In the<br />
R&R Proposed Rules the SEC addressed this, stating that by reducing information<br />
asymmetries, transparency has the potential to lower transaction costs, improve confidence<br />
in the markets, encourage participation by a larger number of participants and increase the<br />
liquidity of the security-based swap markets. The SEC noted that the current markets are<br />
opaque and even market participants such as dealers lack an effective mechanism to learn<br />
the prices at which other market participants transact. Since the security-based swaps are<br />
complex derivative instruments, there exists no single accepted way to model pricing. Public<br />
information would allow for valuation models to be adjusted to reflect how other market<br />
participants have valued security-based swap instruments at a specific time.<br />
IV.<br />
MANDATORY CLEARING<br />
The 2008 financial crisis illustrated the significant risks that an uncleared, OTC<br />
derivatives market can pose to the financial system. The Financial Crisis Inquiry Commission<br />
explained that the scale and nature of the OTC derivatives market created significant systemic<br />
risk throughout the financial system and helped fuel the panic in the fall of 2008; millions of<br />
contracts in this opaque and deregulated market created interconnections among a vast web<br />
of financial institutions through counterparty credit risk, thus exposing the system to<br />
contagion of spreading losses and defaults. The President’s Working Group on Financial<br />
Policy ("PWG") noted shortcomings in the OTC derivatives market as a whole during the crisis.<br />
The PWG identified the need for an improved integrated operational structure supporting<br />
OTC derivatives, specifically highlighting the need for an enhanced ability to manage<br />
counterparty risk through netting and collateral agreements by promoting portfolio<br />
reconciliation and accurate valuation of trades. These issues were exposed in part by the<br />
surge in collateral required between counterparties in 2008 when the ISDA reported an 86%<br />
increase in the collateral in use for OTC derivatives, indicating not only increased risk but also<br />
circumstances in which positions may not have been collateralized.<br />
In the preamble to its proposed rules regarding mandatory clearing, the CFTC stated<br />
that with only limited checks on the amount of risk that a market participant could incur,<br />
great uncertainty was created among market participants. A market participant did not know<br />
the extent of its counterparty’s exposure, whether its counterparty was appropriately hedged,<br />
or if its counterparty was dangerously exposed to adverse market movements. Without<br />
central clearing, a market participant bore the risk that its counterparty would not fulfill its<br />
obligations pursuant to a swap’s terms. As the financial crises deepened, this risk made<br />
market participants wary of trading with each other. As a result, markets quickly became<br />
illiquid and trading volumes plummeted.<br />
86
One of the primary objectives of the Dodd-Frank Act was to promote the central<br />
clearing of swaps and to establish the regulatory infrastructure for the clearing of swaps. 12<br />
The Dodd-Frank Act requires (i) swaps and security-based swaps to be cleared through (x) in<br />
the case of swaps, a DCO if the CFTC determines such swaps are required to be cleared or (x)<br />
in the case of security-based swaps, a registered security-based swap clearing agency ("SBS<br />
CA") if the SEC determines such swaps are required to be cleared (in each case, unless an<br />
exemption from mandatory clearing applies), (ii) swaps and security-based swaps must be<br />
reported to a registered SDR, (iii) if the swap is subject to a clearing requirement, it must be<br />
traded on a DCM or SEF (unless no DCM or SEF has made the swap available to trade), and (iv)<br />
if a security-based swap is subject to a clearing requirement, it must be traded on a registered<br />
exchange or a registered or exempt SEF (unless no facility makes such security-based swap<br />
available for trading).<br />
1. Proposed Rules Regarding the Clearing Requirement<br />
The CFTC has proposed but has not yet finalized rules regarding the mandatory<br />
clearing requirement (the "Proposed Clearing Rules"), while the SEC has not yet made a<br />
proposal.<br />
(a) Timing of Submission for Clearing. The Proposed Clearing Rules would<br />
require all persons executing a swap that is subject to the mandatory clearing requirement to<br />
submit such swap to a DCO for clearing as soon as technologically practicable after execution,<br />
but in any event by the end of the day of execution. Each person subject to this requirement<br />
would be required to undertake reasonable efforts to verify whether a swap is required to be<br />
cleared.<br />
(b) Public Information Regarding Clearing Requirement. The Proposed<br />
Clearing Rules would require each DCO to make publicly available on its website a list of all<br />
swaps that it will accept for clearing and identify which swaps on the list are required to be<br />
cleared. The CFTC will also be required to maintain on its website a current list of all swaps<br />
that are required to be cleared and all DCOs that are eligible to clear such swaps.<br />
(c) Swaps Required to be Cleared. The Proposed Clearing Rules specify two<br />
classes of swaps that would be required to be cleared: (i) interest rate swaps, including those<br />
in the fixed-to-floating swap class, basis swap class, forward rate agreement class and<br />
overnight index swap class, that meet specifications set by the CFTC and (ii) untranched credit<br />
default swaps on certain North American indices and European indices.<br />
12 Clearing is the process by which transactions in derivatives are processed, guaranteed and settled by a central<br />
counterparty defined by the CFTC as a DCO. The DCO becomes the seller to every buyer, and the buyer to every<br />
seller. More specifically, the DCO novates swap transactions initially entered into between various market<br />
participants (e.g., swap dealers and end users) and clears either directly, or indirectly through a futures<br />
commission merchant ("FCM"). The contractual obligations between the original parties ("A" and "B") are replaced<br />
by sets of equivalent obligations between the FCM acting for the original parties and the DCO, and between the<br />
FCM and its individual customers. In economic effect, the DCO serves as a guarantor that every clearing member<br />
party to a cleared swap receives performance according to the terms of the swap, while the FCM serves a<br />
guarantor of its customers’ swaps obligations to the DCO.<br />
87
(d) Clearing Transition Rules. The Proposed Clearing Rules would exempt<br />
from the clearing requirement (i) swaps entered into before July 21, 2010 (the date of<br />
enactment of the Dodd-Frank Act) and (ii) swaps entered into before the application of the<br />
clearing requirement for a particular class of swaps, in each case if reported to an SDR.<br />
(e) Anti-Evasion. The Proposed Clearing Rules provide that it would be<br />
unlawful for any person to: (i) knowingly or recklessly evade or participate in or facilitate the<br />
evasion of the clearing requirements, or (ii) abuse the exceptions to the clearing requirement.<br />
2. Compliance Schedule for Mandatory Clearing<br />
The CFTC has established a phase-in compliance schedule for the mandatory clearing<br />
requirement. The SEC has not yet proposed a compliance schedule for the mandatory<br />
clearing requirement.<br />
The compliance schedule for the clearing requirement is based on the type of market<br />
participants entering into the relevant swap: (i) category 1 participants (swap dealers,<br />
security-based swap dealers, major swap participants, major security-based swap<br />
participants, and "active funds" 13 ) must comply with the clearing requirement no later than 90<br />
days after the publication of the final rules regarding the clearing requirement ("Final CR<br />
Rules"), (ii) category 2 participants (commodity pools, private funds, and persons<br />
predominantly engaged in activities that are in the business of banking, or in activities that<br />
are financial in nature according to Section 4(k) of the Bank Holding Company Act, provided<br />
that such participants are not third-party subaccounts 14 ) must comply within 180 days after<br />
publication of the Final CR Rules, and (iii) all other counterparties must comply within 270<br />
days after publication of the Final CR Rules. Each swap is subject to the latest compliance<br />
date for one of the counterparties.<br />
3. End-User and Other Exemptions<br />
The Dodd-Frank Act provides that the clearing requirement will not apply to a swap or<br />
security-based swap if one of the counterparties is (i) not a financial entity 15 , (ii) is using swaps<br />
13 An "active fund" is defined as any private fund under Section 202(a) of the Investment Advisers Act of 1940 that<br />
is not a third‐party subaccount and which executes 200 or more swaps per month on average over the course of<br />
the 12 months preceding a final clearing determination by the CFTC.<br />
14 A "third‐part subaccount" is a managed account where the managed is unaffiliated with the account’s beneficial<br />
owner and is responsible for the documentation necessary for the account’s beneficial owner to clear swaps.<br />
15 A "financial entity" for purposes of the End‐User Exemption in general includes swap dealers, security‐based<br />
swap dealers, major swap participants, major security‐based swap participants, commodity pools, private funds as<br />
defined in Section 202(a) of the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, employee benefit plans as defined in ERISA, and<br />
persons predominantly engaged in activities that are in the business of banking, or activities that are financial in<br />
nature, as defined in Section 4(k) of the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956. Excluded from the definition of<br />
"financial entity" for purposes of the End‐User Exemption are persons (i) organized as a bank (as defined in Section<br />
3(a) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act) the deposits of which are insured by the FDIC, or a savings association<br />
(as defined in Section 3(b) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act) the deposits of which are insured by the FDIC, or a<br />
farm credit system institution chartered under the Farm Credit Act of 1971, or an insured Federal credit union or<br />
State‐chartered credit union under the Federal Credit Union Act, and (ii) that have total assets of $10 billion or less<br />
88
or security-based swaps to hedge or mitigate commercial risk, and (iii) notifies the CFTC (in<br />
the case of swaps) or the SEC (in the case of security-based swaps) how it generally meets its<br />
financial obligations associated with entering into non-cleared swaps (if there is more than<br />
one electing counterparty, both must provide this information) (the "End-User Exemption").<br />
The CFTC has promulgated final rules regarding the End-User Exemption, while the<br />
SEC has proposed but has not yet finalized rules regarding the End-User Exemption ("SEC<br />
Proposed End-User Exemption Rules").<br />
(a) Hedging or Mitigating Commercial Risk. The CFTC and SEC stated their<br />
intent to use the same definition for "hedging or mitigating commercial risk". The CFTC has<br />
stated that the counterparties should look to the facts and circumstances that exist at the<br />
time the swap is executed to determine whether the swap hedges or mitigates commercial<br />
risk. The CFTC has also stated that whether the risk is "commercial" will be based on the<br />
underlying activity to which the risk relates, not on the type of entity claiming the End-User<br />
Exemption.<br />
A swap is used to "hedging or mitigating commercial risk" if such swap (i) is not used<br />
for a purpose that is in the nature of speculation, investing or trading 16 , and (ii) is not used to<br />
hedge or mitigate the risk of another swap or security-based swap position (unless that other<br />
position itself is used to hedge or mitigate commercial risk):<br />
(i) is economically appropriate 17 to the reduction of risks in the<br />
conduct and management of a commercial enterprise where the risks arise from;<br />
(ii) qualifies as a bona fide hedging for purposes of an exemption<br />
from position limits under the CEA; or<br />
(iii) qualifies for hedging treatment under (a) FASB Topic 815<br />
(Derivatives and Hedging), or (b) GASB Statement 53 (Accounting and Financial Reporting for<br />
Derivative Instruments).<br />
on the last day of such person’s most recent fiscal year. Also excluded from the definition of "financial entity" for<br />
purposes of the End‐User Exemption are "captive finance companies", defined as entities whose primary business<br />
is providing financing, and who use derivatives for the purpose of hedging underlying commercial risks related to<br />
interest rate and foreign currency exposures, 90% or more of which arise from financing that facilitates the<br />
purchase or lease of products, 90% or more of which are manufactured by the parent company or another<br />
subsidiary of the parent company.<br />
16 The CFTC has not designed a test to determine the difference between hedging or mitigating commercial risk<br />
and speculation, investing or trading; however, the CFTC has stated that positions for the purpose of speculation,<br />
investing or trading are, generally speaking, being executed primarily for the purpose of taking an outright view on<br />
market direction or to obtain an appreciation in value of the swap position itself, and are not primarily for the<br />
hedging or mitigating of the underlying commercial risks.<br />
17 The CFTC has stated that facts and circumstances will determine whether the swap is economically appropriate<br />
to hedge or mitigate risk. The CFTC believes this flexible approach is needed given the wide variety of swaps,<br />
potential electing counterparties, and hedging strategies to which the clearing requirement applies.<br />
89
(b) Reporting. When a counterparty elects to use the End-User Exemption,<br />
CFTC regulations require one of the counterparties to report to an SDR (or if no registered<br />
SDR is available to receive the information, to the CFTC) certain information, including:<br />
(i)<br />
(ii)<br />
(iii)<br />
following information:<br />
notice of the election of the exemption,<br />
the identity of the electing counterparty to the swap,<br />
unless previously included in an annual report (see below), the<br />
A. whether the electing counterparty is a financial entity or<br />
is exempt from the definition of financial entity;<br />
B. whether the swaps for which the electing counterparty is<br />
electing the End-User Exemption are being used to<br />
hedge or mitigate commercial risk;<br />
C. how the electing counterparty generally meets its<br />
financial obligations associated with entering into noncleared<br />
swaps; and<br />
D. whether the electing entity is a public company (if so,<br />
additional information must be reported).<br />
An entity that qualifies for the End-User Exemption may report the information listed<br />
in clause (3) above annually in anticipating of electing the End-User Exemption for one or<br />
more swaps.<br />
The reporting counterparty will be determined in accordance with the hierarchy set<br />
forth in the R&R Rules. CFTC regulations require each reporting counterparty to have a<br />
reasonable basis to believe that the electing counterparty meets the requirements of the End-<br />
User Exemption. The SEC Proposed End-User Exemption Rules propose similar reporting<br />
requirements.<br />
(c)<br />
Other Exemptions From the Mandatory Clearing Requirement.<br />
(i) Foreign Governments, Foreign Central Banks and International<br />
Financial Institutions. The CFTC has clarified that the clearing requirement does not apply to<br />
foreign governments, foreign central banks, and international financial institutions; however,<br />
if such an entity enters into a non-cleared swap with a counterparty who is subject to the<br />
clearing requirement, then the counterparty still must comply with the CEA and CFTC<br />
regulations pertaining to non-cleared swaps. The SEC has not addressed this topic.<br />
(ii) Inter-Affiliate Swaps. The CFTC has proposed rules that would<br />
exempt swaps between certain affiliated entities within a corporate group from the clearing<br />
90
equirement. Under the proposed rules, the inter-affiliate swap exemption would be<br />
available if one counterparty directly or indirectly holds a majority ownership interest in the<br />
other, or if a third party directly or indirectly holds a majority ownership interest in both<br />
counterparties, and the financial statements of both counterparties are reported on a<br />
consolidated basis. The proposed rules detail specific conditions counterparties must satisfy<br />
in order to qualify for the inter-affiliate swap exemption. The SEC has not addressed this<br />
topic.<br />
(iii) Cooperatives. The CFTC has proposed rules that would permit<br />
cooperatives that meet certain qualifications to elect not to clear certain swaps that are<br />
otherwise required to be cleared. This exemption is being proposed because certain<br />
cooperatives that execute swaps on behalf of their members for the benefit of their members<br />
may be considered "financial entities" with assets greater than $10 billion. The SEC has not<br />
addressed this topic.<br />
(d) Compliance Dates. The End-User Exemption becomes effective on<br />
September 17, <strong>2012</strong>. However, compliance will not be necessary or possible until swaps<br />
become subject to the clearing requirement and those rules have not yet been finalized.<br />
4. Process for Review of Swaps for Mandatory Clearing<br />
The CFTC and SEC have each issued final rules regarding the process for review of<br />
swaps and security-based swaps for mandatory clearing. For purposes of convenience, the<br />
CFTC rules are summarized below and, unless otherwise noted, the SEC rules are substantially<br />
similar, including the SEC’s rules regarding CA’s which are substantially similar to the CFTC’s<br />
rules regarding DCOs.<br />
(a) DCO Eligibility to Clear Swaps. CFTC regulations state that each DCO will<br />
be presumed eligible to accept for clearing any swap that is within a group, category, type or<br />
class of swaps that the DCO already clears; however, this presumption of eligibility is subject<br />
to review by the CFTC. If a DCO wishes to accept for clearing any other swaps, it must request<br />
a determination of eligibility from the CFTC and such request must include information such<br />
as the sufficiency of the DCO’s financial resources and its ability to manage the risk associated<br />
with clearing the swap.<br />
(b) Swap Submissions. A DCO will be required to submit to the CFTC each<br />
swap or any group, category, type or class of swaps that it plans to accept for clearing<br />
(submissions may be aggregated in the DCO’s discretion). Each submission must include a<br />
statement that the DCO is eligible to accept the swap or group, category, type or class of<br />
swaps and must also include information that will assist the CFTC in making quantitative and<br />
qualitative assessments of the following factors: (i) existence of significant outstanding<br />
notional exposures, trading liquidity, and adequate pricing data; (ii) availability of rule<br />
framework, capacity, operational expertise and resources, and credit support infrastructure to<br />
clear the contract on terms that are consistent with the material terms and trading<br />
conventions on which the contract is then traded; (iii) the effect on the mitigation of systemic<br />
91
isk (taking into account the size of the market for such contract and the resources of the DCO<br />
available to clear the contract); (iv) the effect on competition (including appropriate fees and<br />
charges applied to clearing); and (v) the existence of reasonable legal certainty in the event of<br />
the insolvency of the DCO or one or more of its clearing members with regard to the<br />
treatment of customer and swap counterparty positions, funds and property. Each<br />
submission must also include pricing sources, models and procedures demonstrating an<br />
ability to obtain sufficient data to measure credit exposures in a timely and accurate manner.<br />
In addition, each submission must include risk management procedures. The submissions<br />
will be made available to the public and posted on a CFTC website for a 30-day public<br />
comment period (a DCO may request confidential treatment for portions of its submission).<br />
The CFTC will make a determination of eligibility no later than 90 days after receipt of a<br />
complete submission. SEC rules require (in addition to requirements similar to those<br />
summarized above) SBS CAs to post all their submissions on their website within 2 days of<br />
making the submission to the SEC.<br />
(c) CFTC-Initiated Reviews. The CFTC will, on an ongoing basis, review<br />
swaps that have not been accepted for clearing by a DCO to make a determination as to<br />
whether the swaps should be required to be cleared. If no DCO has accepted for clearing a<br />
particular swap, group, category, type or class of swap that the CFTC finds would otherwise<br />
be subject to a clearing requirement, the CFTC may take such actions as it determines to be<br />
necessary and in the public interest, including requiring retaining of adequate margin or<br />
capital by parties to such swap, group, category, type or class of swaps.<br />
(d) Stay of Clearing Requirement. A counterparty may apply to stay the<br />
clearing requirement pending the CFTC’s review of the terms of the swap, group, category,<br />
type or class of swaps and the clearing arrangement. CFTC regulations require the CFTC to<br />
complete its review no later than 90 days after issuance of the stay and will determine either<br />
that the swap, group, category, type or class of swaps must be cleared, or that the clearing<br />
requirement will not apply but clearing may continue on a non-mandatory basis.<br />
(e) Effective Date. On September 29, 2011, the CFTC rules regarding the<br />
process for review of swaps for mandatory clearing became effective. The SEC rules regarding<br />
the process for review of security-based swaps for mandatory clearing will become effective<br />
30 days after the publication of such rules in the Federal Register; however, the compliance<br />
date for SBS CA submissions is 60 days after the SEC issues its first written determination on<br />
whether a security-based swap (or group, category, type or class of security-based swap) is<br />
subject to mandatory clearing.<br />
5. Customer Clearing Documentation, Timing of Acceptance for Clearing and<br />
Clearing Member Risk<br />
The CFTC has enacted final rules regarding customer clearing documentation, timing<br />
of acceptance for clearing and clearing member risk, while the SEC has not yet proposed rules<br />
on this topic.<br />
92
(a) Customer Clearing Documentation. CFTC rules prohibit futures<br />
commission merchants ("FCMs") that provide clearing services to customers from entering<br />
into an arrangement that (i) discloses to the FCM or any swap dealer or major swap<br />
participant the identity of a customer’s original executing counterparty, (ii) limits the number<br />
of counterparties with whom a customer may enter into a trade, (iii) restricts the size of the<br />
position a customer may take with any individual counterparty, apart from an overall limit for<br />
all positions held by the customer at the FCM, (iv) impairs a customer’s access to execution of<br />
a trade on terms that have a reasonable relationship to the best terms available, or (v)<br />
prevents compliance with the timeframes for acceptance of trades into clearing. CFTC rules<br />
impose similar prohibitions on swap dealers and major swap participants entering into a<br />
swap to be submitted for clearing with a counterparty that is a customer of an FCM.<br />
(b) Time Frames for Acceptance Into Clearing. The CFTC’s stated goal is to<br />
expand access to, and strengthen the financial integrity of, the swap markets by providing for<br />
prompt processing, submission and acceptance of swaps eligible for clearing by a DCO.<br />
With respect to each swap that is not executed on a SEF or DCM, each swap dealer and<br />
major swap participant shall, (i) if such swap is subject to mandatory clearing, submit such<br />
swap for clearing to a DCO as soon as technologically practicable after execution of the swap,<br />
but no later than the close of business on the day of execution and (ii) if such swap is not<br />
subject to mandatory clearing but is accepted for clearing by any DCO and such swap<br />
dealer/major swap participant and its counterparty agree that such swap will be submitted<br />
for clearing, submit such swap for clearing not later than the next business day after<br />
execution of the swap, or the agreement to clear, if later than execution.<br />
Each FCM, swap dealer and major swap participant that is a clearing member of a DCO<br />
must coordinate with each DCO with which it clears to establish systems that enable the<br />
clearing member, or the DCO acting on its behalf, to accept or reject each trade submitted to<br />
the DCO for clearing by or for the clearing member as quickly as would be technologically<br />
practicable if fully automated systems were used. In addition, each FCM, swap dealer and<br />
major swap participant that is a clearing member of a DCO shall accept or reject each trade<br />
submitted by or for it as quickly as would be technologically practicable if fully automated<br />
systems were used.<br />
(c) Clearing Member Risk Management. One of the purposes of the CEA is to<br />
ensure the financial integrity of all transactions subject to the CEA and to avoid systemic risk.<br />
The CFTC has determined that risk management systems are critical to the avoidance of<br />
systemic risk.<br />
CFTC regulations require each FCM that is a clearing member of a DCO and each swap<br />
dealer and major swap participant that is a clearing member of a DCO (only with respect to<br />
clearing activities in futures, security futures products, swaps, agreements, commodity<br />
options, or leveraged transactions) to:<br />
93
(i)<br />
(ii)<br />
(iii)<br />
(iv)<br />
(v)<br />
(vi)<br />
(vii)<br />
(viii)<br />
establish risk-based limits based on position size, order size,<br />
margin requirements or similar factors,<br />
screen orders for compliance with the risk-based limits,<br />
monitor for adherence to the risk-based limits intra-day and<br />
overnight,<br />
conduct stress tests under extreme but plausible conditions for<br />
all positions at least once per week,<br />
evaluate its ability to meet initial margin requirements at least<br />
once per week,<br />
evaluate its ability to meet variation margin requirements in cash<br />
at least once per week,<br />
evaluate its ability to liquidate the positions it clears in an orderly<br />
manner, and estimate the cost of liquidation, and<br />
test all lines of credit at least once per year.<br />
In addition, each FCM, swap dealer and major swap participant that is a clearing<br />
member of a DCO must have written procedures to comply with these risk management<br />
regulations and keep full, complete and systematic records documenting its compliance<br />
(such records must be available promptly upon request to the CFTC or other regulators).<br />
(d) Swap Processing and Clearing. CFTC rules require each swap dealer and<br />
major swap participant to ensure that it has the capacity to route swaps not executed on an<br />
SEF of DCM to a DCO (swaps that are executed on an SEF or DCM will be routed to the DCO by<br />
such SEF or DCM). Each swap dealer and major swap participant will be required to<br />
coordinate with each DCO to which it or its clearing member submits transactions for clearing<br />
to facilitate prompt and efficient swap processing.<br />
(e) Effective Dates. The rules regarding customer clearing documentation,<br />
timing of acceptance for clearing and clearing member risk (i) became effective on March 19,<br />
<strong>2012</strong> for swap dealers and major swap participants, (ii) will become effective on October 1,<br />
<strong>2012</strong> for FCMs, DCMs and DCOs, and (iii) will become effective on the later of October 1, <strong>2012</strong><br />
and the effective date of rules implementing the core principles for SEFs (such rules have<br />
been proposed by the CFTC but not yet finalized).<br />
6. Protection of Cleared Swaps Customer Contracts and Collateral<br />
The CFTC has enacted final rules regarding protection of cleared swaps customer<br />
contracts and collateral, while the SEC has not yet proposed rules on this topic.<br />
94
Clearing members that clear swaps for customers must be registered as FCMs. In the<br />
clearing process for each swap transaction, the DCO is interposed as the counterparty for<br />
each FCM, which is acting for its customer. In a typical swap transaction, a DCO novates the<br />
swap transaction initially entered into between various market participants and cleared<br />
through FCMs that are clearing members of a DCO. Contractual obligations between the<br />
original counterparties are replaced by equivalent obligations between (i) the FCMs (acting<br />
on behalf of the original counterparties) and the DCO and (ii) between the FCMs and their<br />
individual customers. At any given moment, a DCO may owe funds to an FCM, an FCM may<br />
owe funds to the DCO, and an FCM and its customers may also owe funds to each other<br />
based upon daily marking-to-market of the swap contracts, which result in margin calls. All of<br />
these obligations are secured by collateral.<br />
Under the current system, a customer’s collateral is potentially exposed to risks<br />
unrelated to the underlying swap obligation, including (i) the insolvency of the FCM, (ii) that<br />
an FCM would need to access the collateral of a non-defaulting customer to cure a significant<br />
loss of a defaulting customer (this would occur if a customer defaulted and the FCM did not<br />
have sufficient resources to cover the loss, which would result in a default by the FCM to the<br />
DCO and the FCM filing for bankruptcy; in this case, the DCO would have the right to cover its<br />
loss from the FCM’s customer account without regard to which customer’s assets it uses).<br />
The Dodd-Frank Act sought to ameliorate these risks by mandating segregation of<br />
customer collateral. The CFTC has implemented the Dodd-Frank mandate by adopting the<br />
"complete legal segregation model". Under this rule,<br />
FCMs and DCOs must treat and deal with cleared swaps of customers and associated<br />
collateral as belonging to such customer; specifically: (i) FCMs and DCOs are required to<br />
segregate all cleared swaps customer collateral that they receive, and either hold it physically<br />
separate from their own assets or hold it in an account with a permitted depository; (ii) FCMs<br />
and DCOs are prohibited from commingling cleared swaps customer collateral with their own<br />
assets (with certain exceptions); however, the funds of different cleared customers may be<br />
commingled; (iii) FCMs are prohibited from using cleared swaps customer collateral of one<br />
customer to purchase, margin or settle the cleared swaps of any other trade or contract of, or<br />
to secure or extent the credit of, any person other than such customer; (iv) FCMs are<br />
prohibited from imposing or permitting the imposition of a lien on any cleared swaps<br />
customer collateral; (v) FCMs are prohibited from including in cleared swaps customer<br />
collateral money invested in the equity interests or obligations of any DCO, DCM, SEF or SDR<br />
or any money, securities or other property that any DCO holds and may use for purposes<br />
other than customer collateral; and (vi) FCMs are required to maintain in segregated customer<br />
accounts(s) an amount equal to the sum of any credit balances (minus any debits) that the<br />
cleared swaps customers of such FCM have in their accounts.<br />
7. Core Principles for DCOs<br />
The CFTC has enacted final rules regarding 15 out of the 18 core principles established<br />
by the Dodd-Frank Act for DCOs. The remaining core principles regarding governance and<br />
95
fitness standards, conflicts of interest and composition of governing boards will be addressed<br />
in future rulemaking.<br />
(a) Chief Compliance Officer. The Dodd-Frank Act requires each DCO to<br />
appoint a chief compliance officer who will be responsible for developing and enforcing, in<br />
consultation with senior officers and the board, appropriate compliance policies and<br />
procedures. The chief compliance officer must meet with the board of directors and senior<br />
officers annually.<br />
(b) Financial Resources. The Dodd-Frank Act requires each DCO to possess<br />
financial resources that, at a minimum, exceed the total amount that would enable the DCO<br />
to (i) meet its financial obligations to its clearing members (notwithstanding a default by the<br />
clearing member creating the largest financial exposure for the DCO in extreme but plausible<br />
market conditions) and (ii) cover its operating costs for a one year period, as calculated on a<br />
rolling basis. CFTC rulemaking has clarified that a DCO may allocate a financial resource, in<br />
whole or in part, to satisfy the requirement in either clause (i) or (ii) above, but not both<br />
simultaneously. CFTC regulations set forth a list of financial resources that may be included<br />
and also require that such financial resources be sufficiently liquid to enable the DCO to fulfill<br />
its obligations as a central counterparty during a one-day settlement cycle (liquid means cash,<br />
U.S. treasury obligations, or high quality, liquid, general obligations of a sovereign nation).<br />
(c) Participant and Product Eligibility. The Dodd-Frank Act requires each<br />
DCO to establish appropriate admission and continuing eligibility standards for members of<br />
and participants in DCOs, including sufficient financial resources and operational capacity to<br />
meet the obligations arising from participation. Such standards must be publicly disclosed<br />
and must permit fair and open access. The CFTC has clarified that DCOs cannot: (i) require<br />
the clearing members to be swap dealers; (ii) adopt restrictive clearing standards if less<br />
restrictive standards that achieve the same objective would not materially increase risk to the<br />
DCO or clearing members if adopted; or (iii) require clearing members to maintain a swap<br />
portfolio of any particular size or that clearing members meet swap transaction volume<br />
thresholds.<br />
The Dodd-Frank Act also requires each DCO to establish appropriate standards for<br />
determining the eligibility of products submitted to such DCO for clearing. The CFTC has<br />
prescribed factors to be considered in determining product eligibility, including trading<br />
volume, liquidity, availability of reliable prices and ability of the DCO and clearing members to<br />
address any unique risk characteristics of a product.<br />
(d) Risk Management. The Dodd-Frank Act requires each DCO to (i) ensure<br />
that it possesses the ability to manage risks associated with discharging the responsibilities of<br />
the DCO, (ii) measure its credit exposure to each clearing member not less than one per<br />
business day and monitor each such exposure periodically during the business day, and (iii)<br />
through margin requirements and other risk control mechanisms limit its exposure to<br />
potential losses from defaults by clearing members to ensure that (A) its operations would<br />
not be disrupted and (B) non-defaulting clearing members would not be exposed to losses<br />
96
that non-defaulting clearing members cannot anticipate or control. Each DCO must establish<br />
and maintain written policies, procedures and controls approved by its board of directors<br />
which establish a risk-management framework. CFTC regulations set out procedures for<br />
determining margin requirements for clearing members, but allow DCOs flexibility in making<br />
this determination.<br />
CFTC regulations will also require DCOs to conduct stress tests as follows: (i) on a daily<br />
basis for each large trader who poses significant risk to a clearing member or the DCO (DCOs<br />
will have reasonable discretion in determining which traders to test and what methodology<br />
to use); and (ii) on at least a weekly basis for each clearing member account.<br />
(e) Settlement. The Dodd-Frank Act prescribed rules for DCOs regarding<br />
settlements 18 , including requirements to (i) effect a settlement with each clearing member at<br />
least once each business day, and (ii) employ settlement arrangements that eliminate or<br />
strictly limit its exposure to settlement bank risks, including credit and liquidity risks arising<br />
from the use of such banks to effect settlements with its clearing members.<br />
(f) Treatment of Funds. The Dodd-Frank Act required each DCO to (i)<br />
establish standards and procedures that are designed to protect and ensure the safety of its<br />
clearing members’ funds and assets; (ii) hold such funds and assets in a manner by which to<br />
minimize the risk of loss or of delay in the DCO’s access to the assets and funds; and (iii) only<br />
invest such funds and assets in instruments with minimal credit, market and liquidity risks.<br />
CFTC regulations require that each DCO hold funds and assets belonging to clearing<br />
members and its customers in a manner that minimizes the risk of loss or of delay in the<br />
DCO’s access to those funds and assets.<br />
DCOs will also be required to limit the assets they accept as initial margin to those that<br />
have minimal credit, market and liquidity risks, and will be prohibited from accepting letters<br />
of credit as initial margin for swaps (but not as initial margin for futures and options on<br />
futures). In addition DCOs will be required to use prudent valuation practices to value assets<br />
posted as initial margin, including evaluating the appropriateness of haircuts at least on a<br />
quarterly basis. Concentration limits will also be imposed on assets posted as initial margin as<br />
necessary to ensure the DCO’s ability to liquidate those assets quickly with minimal adverse<br />
price effects.<br />
DCOs will be required to have rules providing that they will promptly transfer all or a<br />
portion of a customer’s portfolio of positions and related funds at the same time from the<br />
carrying clearing members of the DCOs to other clearing members without requiring closeout<br />
and re-booking of the positions.<br />
18 "Settlement" is defined to include (i) payment and receipt of variation margin for futures, options and swap<br />
positions, (ii) payment receipt of option premiums, (iii) deposit and withdrawal of initial margin for futures, options<br />
and swap positions, (iv) all payments due in final settlement of futures, options and swap positions on the final<br />
settlement date with respect to such positions, (v) all other cash flows collected from or paid to each clearing<br />
member, including but not limited to payments related to swaps such as coupon amounts.<br />
97
(g) Default Rules and Procedures. The Dodd-Frank Act requires each DCO to<br />
have rules and procedures designed to allow for the efficient, fair and safe management of<br />
events during which clearing members become insolvent or otherwise default on their<br />
obligations to the DCO. These rules and procedures must be publicly available. CFTC<br />
regulations set forth certain procedures which must be adopted by each DCO to contain<br />
losses and liquidity pressures and to continue meeting its obligations in the event of a<br />
default, including the actions that the DCO may take upon default, which include prompt<br />
transfer, liquidation or hedging of customer or house positions of the defaulting clearing<br />
member.<br />
(h) Rule Enforcement. The Dodd-Frank Act requires DCOs to maintain<br />
adequate arrangements and resources for the effective monitoring and enforcement of<br />
compliance with its rules and resolution of disputes.<br />
(i) System Safeguards. The Dodd-Frank Act requires DCOs to establish and<br />
maintain controls and procedures designed to minimize sources of operational risk.<br />
(j) Reporting Requirements. The Dodd-Frank Act requires DCOs to provide<br />
the CFTC with all information that the CFTC determines to be necessary to conduct oversight<br />
of the DCO. Under CFTC regulations DCOs will be subject to periodic reports (daily, quarterly<br />
and annually), reporting of significant events and provision of information upon the CFTC’s<br />
request.<br />
(k) Recordkeeping. The Dodd-Frank Act requires DCOs to maintain records<br />
of all activities related to the business of the DCO as a DCO in form and manner acceptable to<br />
the DCO for not less than 5 years. However, recordkeeping with respect to swap data is<br />
subject to separate rules summarized in Section III of this article.<br />
(l) Public Information. The Dodd-Frank Act requires DCOs to provide<br />
market participants sufficient information to enable them to identify and evaluate accurately<br />
the risks and costs associated with using the DCO’s services, including information regarding<br />
its operating and default procedures and its procedures governing clearing and settlement.<br />
(m) Compliance Dates. DCOs must comply with certain rules by May 6, <strong>2012</strong>,<br />
and with certain other rules by November 8, <strong>2012</strong>.<br />
8. Proposed Rules Regarding SBS CA Standards for Operation and<br />
Governance<br />
The SEC has existing authority over SBS CAs pursuant to the Exchange Act. SBS CAs<br />
are required to register with the SEC prior to performing the functions of a CA, and the SEC is<br />
not permitted to grant registration unless an SBS CA meets set statutory standards. If a SBS<br />
CA is granted registration, the SEC oversees the SBS CA through on-site examinations by SEC<br />
staff. The Dodd-Frank Act tasked the SEC with adopting additional rules to govern SBS CAs<br />
that clear security-based swaps. Accordingly, the SEC has proposed rule regarding operation<br />
and governance standards for registered SBS CAs (the "Proposed SBS CA Rules").<br />
98
(a) Which SBS CAs Would be Subject to New Standards for Operation and<br />
Governance. The types of SBS CAs that are subject to the Proposed SBS CA Rules will be: (i)<br />
SBS CAs that offer central counterparty ("CCP") services for transactions in securities that are<br />
not security-based swaps and those that are security-based swaps, and (ii) SBS CAs that<br />
provide non-CCP services for transactions in securities that are not security-based swaps and<br />
those that are security-based swaps. SBS CAs that offer only non-CCP services would only be<br />
subject to certain of the proposed rules.<br />
(b) Policies and Procedures. Each SBS CA that performs CCP services would<br />
be required to establish, maintain and enforce written policies and procedures reasonably<br />
designed to, among other things:<br />
(i) measure its credit exposures to its participants at least once a<br />
day and limit its exposures to potential losses from defaults by its participants in normal<br />
market conditions so that its operations would not be disrupted and non-defaulting<br />
participants would not be exposed to losses that they cannot anticipate or control;<br />
(ii) use margin requirements and collateral requirements to limit its<br />
credit exposures to participants in normal market conditions and use risk-based models and<br />
parameters to set margin requirements and review them at least monthly;<br />
(iii) maintain sufficient financial resources and robust operational<br />
capacity to meet obligations arising from participation in the clearing agency;<br />
(iv) identify sources of operational risk and minimize them through<br />
development of controls and business continuity plans;<br />
(v)<br />
have governance arrangements that are clear and transparent;<br />
(vi) provide market participants with sufficient information for them<br />
to identify and evaluate the risks and costs associated with using its services;<br />
participants; and<br />
(vii)<br />
(viii)<br />
protect the confidentiality of trading information of the CA’s<br />
address conflicts of interest.<br />
(c) Dissemination of Pricing and Valuation Information. Each SBS CA that<br />
performs CCP services would be required to make publicly available (on terms that are fair<br />
and reasonable and not unreasonably discriminatory) all end-of-day settlement prices and<br />
any other prices with respect to security-based swaps that the clearing agency may establish<br />
to calculate mark-to-market margin requirements for its participants and any other pricing or<br />
valuation information with respect to security-based swaps as is published or distributed by<br />
the SBS CA to its participants.<br />
99
(d) Registration of CAs. Registration of a SBS CA would only be effective for<br />
24 months. Not later than 15 months from the date of registration, the SEC will either grant<br />
continued registration or will institute proceedings to determine whether the SBS CA should<br />
be denied continued registration at the expiration of the previous registration period.<br />
(e) Chief Compliance Officer. Each SBS CA would be required to designate a<br />
Chief Compliance Officer who will report directly to the board of directors or senior officers of<br />
the SBS CA and who will be responsible for administering the policies and procedures<br />
required to be adopted by the CA.<br />
9. Proposed Rules Regarding Mitigating Conflicts of Interest for DCOs/CAs,<br />
DCMs, SEFs and SBS Exchanges<br />
On August 20, 2010 the Commissions held a joint public roundtable to discuss sources<br />
of conflicts of interest at DCOs, CAs, DCMs, SEFs and securities-based national stock<br />
exchanges ("SBS Exchanges"). The CFTC and SEC believe the most significant conflicts of<br />
interest are those that arise when a small number of participants exercise undue control or<br />
influence over a DCO/CA, potentially causing a limitation on open access to the DCO/CA, a<br />
limitation on the scope of products eligible for clearing and reduced risk management<br />
controls. Undue control may be exercised by participants either through voting interests in<br />
the DCO/CA) or through governance of the DCO/CA (e.g., a participant selecting directors of<br />
the DCO/CA). Likewise, similar conflicts of interest arise for DCMs, SEFs and SBS Exchanges.<br />
The CFTC has proposed rules to address conflicts of interest for DCOs, DCMs and SEFs ("CFTC<br />
Proposed COI Rules"), and the SEC in its turn has also proposed rules to address conflicts of<br />
interest for CAs, securities-based SEFs ("SBS SEFs") and SBS Exchanges ("SEC Proposed COI<br />
Rules").<br />
(a) Structural Governance Requirements. The CFTC Proposed COI Rules<br />
would require the governing boards of DCOs, DCMs and SEFs (i) to maintain at least 35%<br />
public directors 19 , and no less than 2 public directors, (ii) not to be operated 20 by another<br />
entity, unless such entity agrees to comport with the board composition requirement and (iii)<br />
to be composed entirely of members with sufficient expertise in financial services, risk<br />
management and clearing services, as applicable. In general, the CFTC’s structural<br />
governance requirements are designed to mitigate conflicts of interest at a DCO, DCM or SEF<br />
by introducing a perspective independent of competitive, commercial or industry<br />
considerations to their governing bodies (e.g., board of directors).<br />
19 "Public Director" is one that has no "material relationship" with the DCO, DCM or SEF. A "material relationship"<br />
exists if (i) the director is an officer or employee of the DCO, DCM or SEF or any of its affiliates, (ii) the director is a<br />
member of the DCO, DCM or SEF or an officer or director of a member of the DCO, DCM or SEF, (iii) the director, or<br />
a firm with which the director is an officer, director or partner, receives more than $100,000 combined annual<br />
payments from the DCO, DCM or SEF, or (iv) any of these relationships apply to a member of the director’s<br />
immediate family (i.e., spouse, parents, children and siblings.)<br />
20 "Operated" means to directly exercise control (including through the exercise of veto power) over the day‐today<br />
business operations of a DCO, DCM or SEF by the sole or majority shareholder or such entity, either through<br />
ownership of voting equity, by contract or otherwise.<br />
100
The CFTC Proposed COI Rules would also require that the governing board of a DCO,<br />
DCM or SEF clearly articulate rules and responsibilities for ensuring regulatory compliance<br />
and to review its performance and the performance of its members at least annually. In<br />
addition, the proposed CFTC Proposed COI Rules would require that each DCO, DCM and SEF<br />
establish a nominating committee and disciplinary panel(s). DCOs would also be required to<br />
establish a risk management committee.<br />
The SEC Proposed COI Rules likewise require CA’s to (i) clearly articulate rules and<br />
responsibilities for ensuring regulatory compliance, (ii) review its performance and the<br />
performance of its members periodically and (iii) have board members with the requisite<br />
expertise. In addition, CA’s are required to have standards for its board of directors and<br />
committee members that set out disqualifying factors concerning serious legal misconduct.<br />
(b) Ownership and Voting Limits. The CFTC Proposed COI Rules would<br />
impose equity ownership limits on DCOs, DCMs and SEFs. Likewise the SEC Proposed COI<br />
Rules would impose equity ownership limits on CAs, security-based SEFs and national<br />
securities exchanges with respect to security-based swaps.<br />
(i) CFTC Proposed COI Rules. The CFTC Proposed COI Rules would<br />
allow DCOs to choose between two alternative ownership limits (and also provide for the<br />
possibility of a waiver of these ownership limits). Under the first alternative, no single<br />
member of a DCO (and related persons) may own more than 20% of the equity interest of the<br />
DCO and no more than 40% of the voting equity of the DCO may be held by enumerated<br />
entities 21 . Under the second alternative, no more than 5% of the voting equity in the DCO<br />
may be owned by any DCO member or enumerated entity and the related persons thereof.<br />
The CFTC Proposed COI Rules would limit DCM or SEF members from (i) beneficially owning<br />
more than 20% of any class of voting equity in the DCM or SEF or (ii) directly or indirectly<br />
voting (e.g., through proxy or shareholder agreement) an interest exceeding 20% of the<br />
voting power of any class of equity interests in the DCM or SEF. DCMs and SEFs would, on the<br />
other hand, be subject to a 20% limitation on the voting equity that any single member (and<br />
related persons) may own.<br />
(ii) SEC Proposed COI Rules. The SEC Proposed COI Rules would<br />
allow SBS CAs to choose between two alternative ownership limits. Under the first<br />
alternative, (i) no single member (and related persons) may own more than 20% of the equity<br />
interest of the SBS CA (ii) no more than 40% of the voting equity of the SBS CA may be held by<br />
participants and their related persons 22 , (iii) the SBS CA would have to establish rules for<br />
divesture of voting interests in excess of the 20%/40% limitations and a mechanism not to<br />
give effect to the portion of any voting interest held by a participant in excess of the 20%/40%<br />
limitations, (iv) at least 35% of board of directors of the SBS CA must be comprised of<br />
21 "Enumerated Entities" include (i) bank holding companies with over $50 billion in total consolidated assets, (ii)<br />
nonbank financial companies supervised by the Federal Reserve and affiliates of such entities, and (iii) swap<br />
dealers, major swap participants and their associated persons.<br />
22 The percentages of ownership in the first alternative pertain to beneficial ownership of any class of voting equity<br />
and also to direct or indirect voting (e.g., through proxy or shareholder agreement).<br />
101
independent directors 23 , and (v) the SBS CA would be required to have a nominating<br />
committee and disciplinary panels.<br />
Under the second alternative, (i) no single member (and related persons) may own<br />
more than 5% of the equity interest of the CA, (ii) the SBS CA would have to establish rules for<br />
divesture of voting interests in excess of the 5% limitation and a mechanism not to give effect<br />
to the portion of any voting interest held by a participant in excess of the 5% limitation, (iii) at<br />
least a majority of the board of directors of the SBS CA must be comprised of independent<br />
directors, and (iv) the SBS CA would be required to have a nominating committee and<br />
disciplinary panels. 24<br />
The SEC Proposed COI Rules would require that SB SEFs and SBS Exchanges not permit<br />
any of their participants or members, as applicable, either alone or together with their related<br />
persons, to (i) beneficially own, directly or indirectly, any interest in such entity that exceeds<br />
20% of any class of securities in such entity, or (ii) directly or indirectly vote, cause the voting<br />
of, or give any consent or proxy with respect to the voting of any interest in such entity that<br />
exceeds 20% of the voting power of any class of securities in such entity. In addition, SEC<br />
Proposed COI Rules would require that the boards of directors of SB SEFs and SBS Exchanges<br />
be comprised of a majority of independent directors.<br />
V. REGISTRATION AND REGULATION OF SWAP DEALERS AND MAJOR SWAP<br />
PARTICIPANTS<br />
1. Registration of Swap Dealers and Major Swap Participants<br />
The CFTC has issued final rules regarding registration of SDs and MSPs, while the SEC<br />
has proposed but not yet finalized rules regarding registration of security-based swap dealers<br />
("SBS SDs") and major security-based swap participants ("SBS MSPs"). The CFTC’s and SEC’s<br />
registration regimes are very similar.<br />
(a) Registration Requirement. The Dodd-Frank Act provided that it shall be<br />
unlawful for any person to act as an SD, SBS SD, MSP, or SDS MSP (collectively, "Swap Entities")<br />
unless such person is registered (i) in the case of SDs and MSPs, the CFTC and (ii) in the case of<br />
SBS SDs and SDS MSPs, with the SEC. In order to become registered, a Swap Entity must file<br />
an application with the CFTC or SEC, as applicable. There is an extensive list of matters that<br />
constitute grounds pursuant to which the CFTC or SEC may refuse to register a person,<br />
including, without limitation, felony conviction, commodities or securities law violations, and<br />
bars or other adverse actions taken by financial regulators. CFTC regulations also require<br />
each SD and SMP to be a registered member of a registered futures association.<br />
23 As with the CFTC "public director" concept, the "independent director" concept focuses on material<br />
relationships with certain entities.<br />
24 The percentages of ownership in the first and second alternatives pertain to beneficial ownership of any class of<br />
voting equity and also to direct or indirect voting (e.g., through proxy or shareholder agreement.<br />
102
(b) Statutory Disqualification. The Dodd-Frank Act makes it unlawful for a<br />
Swap Entity to permit any person associated 25 with it who is subject to a statutory<br />
disqualification to effect or be involved in effecting swaps on behalf of the Swap Entity, if the<br />
Swap Entity knew, or in the exercise of reasonable care should have known, of the statutory<br />
disqualification; however, this prohibition does not apply to any person listed as principal or<br />
registered as an associated person of an FCM, retail foreign exchange dealer, introducing<br />
broker, commodity pool operator, commodity trading advisor, or leverage transaction<br />
merchant, or any person registered as a floor broker or floor trader, notwithstanding that the<br />
person is subject to disqualification from registration.<br />
(c) Duration of Registration. Under the CFTC’s final rules and the SEC’s<br />
proposed rules, a Swap Entity would continue to be registered until the effective date of any<br />
cancellation, revocation or withdrawal of registration or any other event the CFTC or SEC<br />
determines should trigger expiration. The SEC’s proposed rules also address succession: if an<br />
SBS SD or SBS MSP succeeds to and continues the business of another SBS SD or SBS MSP, the<br />
registration of the predecessor will remain effective as the registration of the successor if the<br />
successor files an application for registration within 30 days after such succession and the<br />
predecessor files a notice of withdrawal from registration.<br />
(d) Non-U.S. Entities. Under the SEC’s proposed rules, nonresident SBS SDs<br />
and SBS MSPs that are required to register with the SEC would be required to (i) appoint an<br />
agent for service of process in the U.S. and provide the SEC with the identity and address of<br />
such agent, and (ii) certify that the firm can, as a matter of law, provide the SEC with prompt<br />
access to its books and records and can submit to onsite inspection and examination by the<br />
SEC, and provide a legal opinion as to the foregoing. The CFTC has not yet addressed this<br />
topic.<br />
(e) Compliance Dates. An SD will be required to register on the earlier of (i)<br />
December 31, <strong>2012</strong> or (ii) within 2 months following the end of the month in which it exceeds<br />
the applicable de minimis threshold of aggregate notional amount of swaps executed 26 . An<br />
MSP will be required to register no later than February 28, 2013. 27 SDs and MSPs may<br />
25 "Associated person" means a natural person associated with a Swap Entity as a partner, officer, employee or<br />
agent (or functionally similar role) in a capacity that involves solicitation or acceptance of swaps, or the supervision<br />
of persons so engaged.<br />
26 The definition of "swap dealer" provides an exemption from such definition where the aggregate notional<br />
amounts of a person’s positions connected with its dealing activity over a specified period of time do not exceed<br />
certain thresholds.<br />
27 Under the rules defining "major swap participant", a person that meets the criteria for being an MSP as a result<br />
of its swap activities in a fiscal quarter but who has not registered as an MSP will not be deemed to be an MSP until<br />
the earlier of (i) the date on which it submits a complete application for registration as an MSP or (ii) 2 months<br />
after the end of that fiscal quarter. A person will have to start its MSP calculations based on all outstanding swaps<br />
on and after October 12, <strong>2012</strong>. This means that the first fiscal quarter for the MSP determination is the one that<br />
ends on December 31, <strong>2012</strong> and any person whose swap activities for that quarter exceed any applicable MSP<br />
threshold by more than 20% will have to submit an application for registration as an MSP within 2 months of<br />
December 31, <strong>2012</strong>, which is February 28, 2013.<br />
103
voluntary register prior to these deadlines. SBS SDs and SBS MSPs will be permitted to<br />
register as soon as final registration rules are adopted by the SEC.<br />
2. Business Conduct Standards for Swap Dealers and Major Swap<br />
Participants<br />
The CFTC has issued final rules (the "CFTC Business Conduct Rules") regarding business<br />
conduct standards for SDs and MSPs, while the SEC has proposed but not yet finalized rules<br />
regarding business conduct standards for SDS SDs and SDS MSPs (the "SEC Proposed Business<br />
Conduct Rules"). The CFTC and SEC worked closely together to establish consistent<br />
requirements for CFTC and SEC registrants to the extent practicable. For purposes of<br />
convenience, the CFTC Business Conduct Rules are summarized below and, unless otherwise<br />
indicated, the SEC Proposed Business Conduct Rules are substantially similar.<br />
(a) Scope. The CFTC Business Conduct Rules apply in connection with<br />
transactions in swaps as well as in connection with swaps that are offered 28 but not entered<br />
into. The CFTC’s business conduct rules generally do not distinguish between SDs and MSPs;<br />
however, rules for MSPs do not include the suitability duty, pay-to-play, "known your<br />
counterparty" and scenario analysis provisions (each of these rules are summarized below). In<br />
addition, the CFTC has determined not to require that SDs provide MSPs with the same<br />
protection afforded to other counterparties. Nor is the CFTC requiring SDs to allow MSPs to<br />
opt in to receive certain protections, such as daily mark, suitability or scenario analysis, that<br />
are afforded to counterparties generally. SDs and MSPs will not need to comply with the<br />
CFTC business conduct rules for swaps entered into with their affiliates where the transaction<br />
would not be a publicly reportable transaction. 29<br />
As summarized below, certain of the CFTC’s business conduct rules will not apply<br />
when (i) a transaction is initiated by a special entity on a DCM or SEF and (ii) the SD or MSP<br />
does not know the identity of the counterparty to the transaction.<br />
The CFTC has confirmed that the business conduct standards will not apply to<br />
unexpired swaps executed before the effective date of the CFTC Business Conduct Rules.<br />
(b) Policies and Procedures. Each SD and MSP is required to establish<br />
written policies and procedures reasonably designed to ensure compliance with the CFTC<br />
Business Conduct Rules, and prevent the SD or MSP from evading or participating in or<br />
facilitating an evasion of any provision of the CFTC Business Conduct Rules. However, each<br />
SD or MSP may consider the nature of its particular business in developing its policies and<br />
procedures and tailor them accordingly.<br />
28 "Offer" has the same meaning as in contract law, such that, if accepted, the terms of the offer would form a<br />
binding contract.<br />
29 A "publicly reportable transaction" means, among other things, any executed swap that is an arm’s length<br />
transaction between two parties that results in a corresponding change in the market risk position between the<br />
two parties.<br />
104
(c)<br />
Information Regarding Counterparties.<br />
(i) Know Your Counterparty. Each SD must implement policies and<br />
procedures reasonably designed to obtain and retain a record of the essential facts 30<br />
concerning each counterparty whose identity is known to the SD prior to the execution of the<br />
transaction that are necessary for conducting business with the counterparty. MSPs are<br />
excluded from this requirement.<br />
(ii) True Name and Owner. Each SD and MSP must obtain and retain<br />
a record of the true name and address of each counterparty whose identity is known to the<br />
SD or MSP prior to the execution of the swap, the principal occupation or business of such<br />
counterparty, as well as the name and address of any other person guaranteeing the<br />
performance of such counterparty and any person exercising any control with respect to the<br />
positions of such counterparty.<br />
(d) Prohibition on Fraud, Manipulation and Other Abusive Practices. CFTC<br />
Business Conduct Rules make it unlawful for an SD or MSP to engage in any act, practice or<br />
course of business that is fraudulent, deceptive or manipulative. This prohibition imposes a<br />
non-scienter standard (that is, intent does not have to be proven); however, an affirmative<br />
defense is available: an SD or MSP can establish that (i) it did not act intentionally or<br />
recklessly in connection with the alleged violation, and (ii) it complied in good faith with its<br />
written policies and procedures designed to avoid such a violation.<br />
(e) Communications; Fair Dealing. With respect to any communications<br />
between an SD or MSP and any counterparty, the SD or MSP must communicate in a fair and<br />
balanced manner based on principles of fair dealing and good faith. This requirement works<br />
in tandem with the anti-fraud rules. This requirement is meant to address the findings in the<br />
Senate report titled "Wall Street and the Financial Crises: Anatomy of a Financial Collapse",<br />
issued April 13, 2011, that swap transactions which included structured CDOs were<br />
problematic because they were designed to fail and the disclosures omitted and/or<br />
misrepresented the material risks, characteristics, incentives and conflicts of interest.<br />
(f) Confidential Treatment of Counterparty Information. The CFTC Business<br />
Conduct Rules make it unlawful for an SD or MSP to (i) disclose to any other person any<br />
material confidential information provided by or on behalf of a counterparty to the SD or<br />
MSP, or (ii) use for its own purposes in any way that would tend to be materially adverse to<br />
the interests of a counterparty, any material confidential information provided by or on behalf<br />
of a counterparty to the SD or MSP; however, an SD or MSP may disclose or use material<br />
confidential information provided by or on behalf of a counterparty to the SD or MSP if such<br />
disclosure or use is authorized in writing by such counterparty or is necessary for the effective<br />
30 "Essential facts" include (i) facts necessary to comply with applicable laws, regulations and rules, (ii) facts<br />
necessary to effectuate the SD’s credit and operational risk management policies in connection with transactions<br />
entered into with such counterparty, (iii) information regarding the authority of any person acting for such<br />
counterparty, and (iv) if the counterparty is a special entity, such background information regarding the<br />
independent representative as the SD reasonably deems appropriate.<br />
105
execution of any swap for or with such counterparty, to hedge or mitigate any exposure<br />
created by such swap, or to comply with a request from the SEC, Department of Justice, any<br />
self-regulatory organization designated by the CFTC, or an applicable prudential regulator, or<br />
is otherwise required by law. Each SD and MSP must implement written policies and<br />
procedures reasonably designed to protect material confidential information provided by or<br />
on behalf of a counterparty to the SD or MSP.<br />
(g) Verification of Counterparty Eligibility. SDs and MSPs must verify, prior to<br />
offering to enter into or entering into a swap, (i) that a counterparty meets the eligibility<br />
standards for an eligible contract participant (ECP) and (ii) whether the counterparty is a<br />
special entity (if so, the SD or MSP must notify such entity of its right to make an election to be<br />
treated as a special entity). In making this verification, SDs and MSPs may rely on written<br />
representations of a counterparty in the absence of red flags. The verification requirement<br />
will not apply with respect to (i) a transaction that is initiated on a DCM or (ii) a transaction<br />
that is initiated on an SEF, if the SD or MSP does not know the identity of the counterparty to<br />
the transaction prior to execution.<br />
(h)<br />
Disclosure of Material Information.<br />
(i) Disclosure of Material Information. At a reasonably sufficient<br />
time prior to entering into a swap, an SD or MSP must disclose to any counterparty to the<br />
swap (other than an SD, SBS SD, MSP, or SBS MSP) material information 31 concerning the swap<br />
in a manner reasonably designed to allow the counterparty to assess (i) the material risks of<br />
the particular swap, which may include market, credit, liquidity, foreign currency, legal<br />
operational, and any other applicable risks (this requirement will be interpreted consistently<br />
with industry best practice regarding disclosure of material risks), (ii) the material<br />
characteristics of the particular swap, which shall include the material economic terms of the<br />
swap, the terms relating to the operation of the swap, and the rights and obligations of the<br />
parties during the term of the swap, and (iii) the material incentives and conflicts of interest<br />
that the SD or MSP may have in connection with the particular swap, which shall include the<br />
price of the swap and the mid-market mark of the swap, and any compensation or other<br />
incentive from any source other than the counterparty that the SD or MSP may receive in<br />
connection with the swap.<br />
(ii) Scenario Analysis. Prior to entering into a swap with a<br />
counterparty (other than an SD, SBS SD, MSP, or SBS MSP) that is not available for trading on a<br />
DCM or SEF, an SD must (i) notify the counterparty that it can request and consult on the<br />
design of a scenario analysis to allow the counterparty to assess its potential exposure in<br />
connection with the swap, (ii) upon request of the counterparty, provide a scenario analysis,<br />
which is designed in consultation with the counterparty and done over a range of<br />
assumptions, including severe downside stress scenarios that would result in significant loss,<br />
(iii) disclose all material assumptions and explain the calculation methodologies used to<br />
31 Information is "material" if there is a substantial likelihood that a reasonable investor would consider the<br />
information to be important in making an investment decision.<br />
106
perform any requested scenario analysis (provided, however, that the SD is not required to<br />
disclose confidential, proprietary information), and (iv) in designing any requested scenario<br />
analysis, consider any relevant analysis that the SD undertakes for its own risk management<br />
purposes. Regarding the parameters of the scenario analysis, the CFTC directed SDs and<br />
MSPs to use industry best practices for scenario analysis for high-risk complex financial<br />
instruments. The scenario analysis requirements will not apply with respect to with respect to<br />
(i) a transaction that is initiated on a DCM or (ii) a transaction that is initiated on an SEF, if the<br />
SD does not know the identity of the counterparty to the transaction prior to execution. The<br />
SEC Proposed Business Conduct Rules do not include a scenario analysis requirement, but the<br />
SEC requested comments regarding whether such requirement should be implemented.<br />
(iii) Daily Mark. Each SD and MSP must (i) for cleared swaps, notify a<br />
counterparty (other than an SD, SBS SD, MSP, or SBS MSP) of the counterparty’s right to<br />
receive, upon request, the daily mark 32 from the appropriate DCO, (ii) for uncleared swaps,<br />
provide a counterparty (other than an SD, SBS SD, MSP, or SBS MSP) with a daily mark, which<br />
shall be in the mid-market mark of the swap 33 , during the term of the swap as of the close of<br />
business or such other time as the parties agree in writing, (iii) for uncleared swaps, disclose<br />
to the counterparty (A) the methodology and assumptions used to prepare the daily mark<br />
and any material changes during the term of the swap (provided, however, that the SD is not<br />
required to disclose confidential, proprietary information), and (B) additional information<br />
concerning the daily mark to ensure a fair and balanced communication 34 . According to the<br />
SEC Proposed Business Conduct Rules, the daily mark is intended to provide a counterparty<br />
with a useful and meaningful reference point against which to assess, among other things,<br />
the calculation of variation margin for a swap or portfolio of swaps, and otherwise inform the<br />
counterparty’s understanding of its financial relationship with the Swap Entity.<br />
(iv) No Fiduciary Capacity. The CFTC confirmed that compliance<br />
with the requirements of the CFTC Business Conduct Rules alone do not cause an SD or MSP<br />
to assume advisory responsibilities or become a fiduciary. Moreover, the Department of<br />
Labor has confirmed that SDs and MSPs acting as counterparties to ERISA plans will not be<br />
considered to be ERISA fiduciaries.<br />
(v) Clearing Disclosures. Each SD and MSP must notify any<br />
counterparty (other than an SD, SBS SD, MSP, or SBS MSP) with which it entered into a swap<br />
that is subject to mandatory clearing that the counterparty has the sole right to select the<br />
DCO at which the swap will be cleared. For swaps not subject to a mandatory clearing<br />
32 The daily mark is the end‐of‐day settlement price, which is the value of any given swap used by the DCO/CA that<br />
forms the basis of subsequent margin calculations for clearing participants.<br />
33 The mid‐market mark of the swap shall not include amounts for profit, credit reserve, hedging, funding, liquidity<br />
, or any other costs or adjustments. The mid‐market mark can be determined through mark‐to‐model calculations<br />
when a liquid market does not exist.<br />
34 Additional information may include (i) the daily mark may not necessarily be a price at which either the<br />
counterparty or the SD or MSP would agree to replace or terminate the swap, (ii) depending upon the agreement<br />
of the parties, calls for margin may be based on considerations other than the daily mark provided to the<br />
counterparty, and (iii) the daily mark may not necessarily be the value of the swap that is marked on the books of<br />
the SD or MSP.<br />
107
equirement, each SD and MSP must notify any counterparty (other than an SD, SBS SD, MSP,<br />
or SBS MSP) with which it entered into a swap that the counterparty may elect to require the<br />
clearing of the swap and will have the sole right to select the DCO at which the swap will be<br />
cleared.<br />
(i) Recommendations to Counterparties - Institutional Suitability. An SD that<br />
recommends 35 a swap or trading strategy involving a swap to a counterparty (other than an<br />
SD, SBS SD, MSP, or SBS MSP) must undertake reasonable diligence to understand the<br />
potential risks and rewards associated with the recommended swap or trading strategy, and<br />
have a reasonable basis to believe that the recommended swap or trading strategy is suitable<br />
for the counterparty (to establish a reasonable basis for a recommendation, an SD must have<br />
or obtain information about the counterparty, including its investment profile, trading<br />
objectives, and ability to absorb potential losses). The CFTC Business Conduct Rules provide<br />
for a safe harbor: an SD can fulfill these obligations if (i) the SD reasonably determines that<br />
the counterparty (or an agent to which it has delegated decision-making authority) is capable<br />
of independently evaluating investment risks with regard to the relevant swap or trading<br />
strategy involving a swap, (ii) the counterparty or its agent represents in writing that it is<br />
exercising independent judgment in evaluating the recommendations of the SD with regard<br />
to the relevant swap or trading strategy involving a swap, (iii) the SD discloses in writing that<br />
it is acting in its capacity as a counterparty and is not undertaking to assess the suitability of<br />
the swap or trading strategy involving a swap for the counterparty, and (iv) in the case of a<br />
counterparty that is a special entity, the SD has notified the entity that it can elect to be<br />
treated as a special entity. An SD may rely on representations of the counterparty to make<br />
the determinations necessary to use the safe harbor.<br />
(j) Requirements for SDs Acting as Advisors to Special Entities. An SD that acts<br />
as an advisor to a special entity 36 will have a duty to make a reasonable determination that<br />
any swap or trading strategy involving a swap recommended by the SD is in the best interests<br />
of the special entity, and must make reasonable efforts to obtain such information as is<br />
necessary to make such reasonable determination, including information relating to the<br />
financial status and future funding needs of the special entity, its tax status, the special<br />
entity’s experience with swaps generally and swaps of the complexity being recommended<br />
and whether the special entity has the financial capability to withstand changes in market<br />
35 The determination of whether a "recommendation" has been made is an objective rather than a subjective<br />
inquiry. An important factor is whether , given its content, context and manner of presentation, a particular<br />
communication from an SD to a counterparty reasonably would be viewed as a "call to action" or suggestion that<br />
the counterparty enter into a swap. An analysis of the content, context and manner of presentation of a<br />
communication requires examination of the underlying substantive information transmitted to the counterparty<br />
and consideration of any other facts and circumstances, such as any accompanying explanatory message from the<br />
SD. Additionally, the more individually tailored a communication to a specific counterparty or a targeted group of<br />
counterparties about a swap, group of swaps or trading strategy involving the use of a swap, the greater the<br />
likelihood that the communication may be viewed as a "recommendation".<br />
36 An SD "acts as an advisor to a special entity" when it recommends a swap or trading strategy involving a swap<br />
that is tailored to the particular needs or characteristics of the special entity. The CFTC Business Conduct Rules<br />
provide safe harbors detailing when an SD will not be deemed to be acting as an advisor.<br />
108
conditions. An SD may rely on written representations of the special entity to satisfy the<br />
requirements to make reasonable efforts to obtain necessary information.<br />
(i) Requirements for SDs and MSPs Acting As Counterparties to Special<br />
Entities. Any SD or MSP that offers to enter or enters into a swap with a special entity (other<br />
than an employee benefit plan subject to Title I of ERISA) must have a reasonable basis to<br />
believe that the special entity has a representative that (i) has sufficient knowledge to<br />
evaluate the transaction and risks, (ii) is not subject to statutory disqualification, (iii) is<br />
independent 37 of the SD or MSP, (iv) undertakes a duty to act in the best interests of the<br />
special entity, (v) makes appropriate and timely disclosures to the special entity and (vi)<br />
evaluates, consistent with any guidelines provided by the special entity, fair pricing and the<br />
appropriateness of the swap. An SD or MSP will be deemed to have reasonable basis to<br />
believe that the special entity has a representative that meets the requirements set forth<br />
above if it reasonably relies on (i) written representations of the special entity that it has<br />
complied in good faith with written policies and procedures regarding selection of qualified<br />
representatives and (ii) written representations of the representative that it meets the<br />
requirements set forth above.<br />
If the SD or MSP determines that it has no reasonable basis to believe that the<br />
representative of the special entity meets the above criteria, the SD or MSP must make a<br />
written record of its basis for such determination and submit such determination to its chief<br />
compliance officer for review to ensure that the SD or MSP has a substantial, unbiased basis<br />
for the determination.<br />
Prior to the initiation of a swap, an SD or MSP must disclose to a special entity in<br />
writing the capacity in which it is acting in connection with the swap, and if it engages in<br />
business with the special entity in more than one capacity, disclose the material differences<br />
between such capacities<br />
The above requirements do not apply if the transaction is (i) initiated on a DCM or SEF<br />
and (ii) one in which the SD or MSP does not know the identity of the counterparty to the<br />
transaction prior to execution.<br />
(k) Political Contributions by Certain SDs ("Pay to Play Rules"). In order to<br />
prevent fraud, the CFTC Business Conduct Rules prohibit SDs from offering to enter into or<br />
entering into a swap or trading strategy involving a swap with a governmental special entity<br />
within 2 years after any contribution (other than a de minimis contribution) to an official of<br />
37 A representative is "independent" of the SD or MSP if (i) it is not, and within 1 year of representing the special<br />
entity in connection with the swap was not, an associated person of the SD or MSP, (ii) the SD or MSP is not a<br />
principal of the representative, (iii) the representative provides timely and effective disclosures to the special<br />
entity of all material conflicts of interest that could reasonably affect the judgment or decision making of the<br />
representative with respect to its obligations to the special entity, (iv) the representative complies with policies<br />
and procedures designed to mitigate conflicts of interest, (v) the representative is not directly or indirectly,<br />
through one or more persons, controlled by, in control of, or under common control with the SD or MSP, and (vi)<br />
the SD or MSP did not refer, recommend or introduce the representative to the special entity within 1 year of the<br />
representative’s representation of the special entity in connection with the swap.<br />
109
such governmental special entity was made by the SD or any covered associates 38 of the SD.<br />
The CFTC Business Conduct Rules provide for certain exceptions to this prohibition. This<br />
prohibition does not apply if the transactions is (i) initiated on a DCM or SEF and (ii) one in<br />
which the SD or MSP does not know the identity of the counterparty to the transaction prior<br />
to execution. The CFTC Business Conduct Rules also prohibit an SD from paying a third party<br />
to solicit any government special entity to enter into swaps, unless such party is also subject<br />
to "pay to play" regulations.<br />
The CFTC Business Conduct Rules also contain a non-circumvention provision,<br />
prohibiting SDs from directly or indirectly doing any act that would result in a violation of the<br />
prohibition on political contributions.<br />
An SD can apply to the CFTC for an exemption under certain circumstances.<br />
(l) Record Retention. SDs and MSPs must create a record of their<br />
compliance with the business conduct requirements and retain these records and make them<br />
available to regulators upon request.<br />
(m) Chief Compliance Officer. Each SD, MSP and FCM must have a chief<br />
compliance officer that is appointed by and reports directly to the board of directors or senior<br />
management of such SD, MSP or FCM. Unlike the chief compliance officer of an SDR, the chief<br />
compliance officer of an SD, MSP or FCM may be the general counsel or part of the legal<br />
department. The chief compliance officer must be responsible for, among other things,<br />
administering policies and procedures reasonably designed to ensure compliance with the<br />
CEA and CFTC regulations, resolve any conflicts of interest in consultation with the board of<br />
directors or senior management, developing procedures for correcting actions for<br />
noncompliance and conducting an annual review, and preparing and furnishing to the CFTC<br />
an annual compliance report.<br />
(n) Compliance Dates. SDs and MSPs must comply with the business<br />
conduct rules by the later of (i) October 14, <strong>2012</strong> and (ii) the date on which SDs and MSPs are<br />
required to apply for registration with the CFTC.<br />
3. Duties of Swap Dealers and Major Swap Participants<br />
The CFTC has issued final rules regarding duties of SDs and MSPs, while the SEC has<br />
not yet proposed rules on this topic for SDS SDs and SDS MSPs.<br />
(a) Risk Management Program. Each SD and MSP must establish, document,<br />
maintain and enforce a system of risk management policies and procedures designed to<br />
monitor and manage the risks associated with the swaps activities of the SD or MSP (the "Risk<br />
38 "Covered associates" include (i) any general partner, managing member, or executive officer, or other person<br />
with a similar status or function, (ii) any employee who solicits a governmental special entity for the SD and any<br />
person who supervises, directly or indirectly, such employee, and (iii) any political action committee (PAC)<br />
controlled by the SD or by any person described in clauses (i) or (ii) above.<br />
110
Management Program"). The Risk Management Program must be written, approved by the<br />
governing board of the SD or MSP, and a copy must be furnished to the CFTC.<br />
Each SD and MSP must establish and maintain a risk management unit with sufficient<br />
authority, qualified personnel and financial, operational, and other resources to carry out the<br />
Risk Management Program. This unit must report directly to senior management and must<br />
be independent from the SD’s or MSP’s business trading unit 39 .<br />
The Risk Management Program must be reviewed and tested at least annually and<br />
upon any material change in the business of the SD or MSP that is reasonably likely to alter its<br />
risk profile. Each SD and MSP must document all internal and external reviews and testing of<br />
the Risk Management Program including the dates of each test, the results, any deficiencies<br />
identified and corrective action taken, which documentation must be provided to the CFTC<br />
upon request.<br />
The Risk Management Program must contain the following elements:<br />
(i) Identification of Risks and Risk Tolerance Limits. The Risk<br />
Management Program should take into account market, credit, liquidity, foreign currency,<br />
legal, operational, settlement, risks posed by affiliates and any other applicable risks together<br />
with a description of the risk tolerance limits set by the SD or MSP and the underlying<br />
methodology. The risk tolerance limits must be approved quarterly by senior management<br />
and annually by the governing body of the SD or MSP. The Risk Management Program must<br />
include policies and procedures for detecting breaches of risk tolerance limits.<br />
(ii) Periodic Risk Exposure Reports. The risk management unit of<br />
each SD and MSP must prepare quarterly written reports for senior management and the<br />
governing body (copies of which must be provided to the CFTC) setting forth risk exposure of<br />
the SD or MSP and any recommended changes to the Risk Management Program.<br />
(iii) New Product Policy. The Risk Management Program must<br />
include a new product policy designed to identify and take into account the risks of any new<br />
product prior to engaging in transactions involving such new product.<br />
(iv) Use of Central Counterparties. The Risk Management Program<br />
must include policies and procedures relating to its use of central counterparties, which must<br />
require use of central counterparties when required under CFTC regulations (unless an<br />
exemption has been obtained), set forth conditions for voluntary use of central<br />
counterparties, and require diligent investigation into the adequacy of financial resources and<br />
risk management procedures of any central counterparties through which the SD or MSP<br />
clears.<br />
39 "Business trading unit" means any department, division, group or personnel of an SD or MSP or any of its<br />
affiliates, whether or not identified as such, that performs, or personnel exercising direct supervisory authority<br />
over the performance of, any pricing (excluding price verification for risk management purposes), trading, sales,<br />
marketing, advertising, solicitation, structuring or brokerage activities on behalf of the SD or MSP.<br />
111
(v) Compliance With Margin and <strong>Capital</strong> Requirements. Each SD<br />
and MSP must satisfy all statutory capital and margin requirements.<br />
(vi) Monitoring of Compliance with the Risk Management Program.<br />
The Risk Management Program must include policies and procedures to detect violations of<br />
the Risk Management Program and to encourage employees to report such violations.<br />
(b) Business Trading Unit. Each SD and MSP must establish policies and<br />
procedures that, at a minimum (i) require all trading policies to be approved by its governing<br />
body, (ii) require that traders execute transactions only with counterparties for whom credit<br />
limits have been established, (iii) provide specific quantitative or qualitative limits for traders<br />
and personnel able to commit the capital of the SD or MSP, (iv) monitor each trader<br />
throughout the day to prevent them from exceeding any limits and from otherwise incurring<br />
unauthorized risk, (v) require each trader to follow established policies and procedures for<br />
executing and confirming transactions, (vi) establish means to detect unauthorized trading<br />
activities or any other violations of policies and procedures, (vii) ensure that all material trade<br />
discrepancies are documented and brought to the attention to management, (viii) ensure<br />
that broker statements and payments to brokers are periodically audited by persons<br />
independent of the business trading unit, (ix) ensure that use of trading programs is subject<br />
to policies and procedures governing use, supervision, maintenance, testing and inspection<br />
of the program, and (x) require the separation of personnel in the business trading unit from<br />
personnel in the risk management unit.<br />
(c) Monitoring of Position Limits. Each SD and MSP must establish and<br />
enforce written policies and procedures that are reasonably designed to monitor for and<br />
prevent violations of applicable position limits established by the CFTC, a DCM or SEF, and to<br />
monitor for and prevent improper reliance upon any exemptions or exclusion from such<br />
limits. These policies and procedures must be audited on an annual basis by the SD or MSP.<br />
Training must be provided to all relevant personnel on applicable position limits on an annual<br />
basis, as well as notifications of any change in position limits.<br />
Each SD and MSP must diligently monitor its trading activities and diligently supervise<br />
the actions of its partners, officers, employees and agents to ensure compliance with position<br />
limits. In addition, each SD and MSP must implement an early warning system designed to<br />
detect and alert its senior management when position limits are in danger of being breached.<br />
Any detected violation must be reported promptly to the SD’s or MSP’s governing body and<br />
to the CFTC. Records must be maintained of any early warning received, any position limit<br />
violation detected, any action taken as a result of either, and the date action was taken.<br />
Position limits must be tested by each SD and MSP for adequacy and effectiveness at<br />
least once each calendar quarter. Records must be maintained of such tests, the results<br />
thereof, any action taken as a result thereof, and any recommended changes to the Risk<br />
Management Program as a result thereof.<br />
112
Compliance with position limits must be documented and quarterly reports on<br />
compliance must be reviewed by each SD’s or MSP’s chief compliance officer, senior<br />
management and governing body.<br />
(d) Diligent Supervision. Each SD and MSP must establish and maintain a<br />
system to supervise, and shall diligently supervise, all activities relating to its business<br />
performed by its partners, members, officers, employees and agents (or persons occupying a<br />
similar status or performing a similar function). Such system must be reasonably designed to<br />
achieve compliance with the CEA and CFTC regulations. The supervisory system must<br />
provide for the designation of at least one person with authority to carry out the supervisory<br />
responsibilities of the SD or MSP. In addition, the supervisory system must require for use of<br />
reasonable efforts to determine that all supervisors are appropriately qualified.<br />
(e) Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery. Each SD and MSP must<br />
establish and maintain a written business continuity and disaster recovery plan that outlines<br />
the procedures to be followed in the event of an emergency or other disruption of its normal<br />
business activities. The plan must be designed to enable the SD or MSP to continue or<br />
resume any operations by the next business day with minimal disturbance to its<br />
counterparties and the market, and to recover all documentation and data required to be<br />
maintained by applicable law and regulation. CFTC rules set forth essential components to be<br />
included in each business continuity and disaster recovery plan. Copies of the plan must be<br />
provided to all relevant employees and such relevant employees must receive training in<br />
connection with the plan.<br />
If any emergency or other disruption occurs that may affect the ability of the SD or<br />
MSP to fulfill its regulatory obligations or would have a significant adverse effect on the SD or<br />
MSP, its counterparties or the market, the SD or MSP must notify the CFTC.<br />
Each SD and MSP must provide to the CFTC the name and contact information of 2<br />
employees who will be emergency contacts in the event of any disruption. These individuals<br />
must be authorized to make key decisions on behalf of the SD or MSP and have knowledge of<br />
the firm’s business continuity and disaster recovery plan.<br />
The business continuity and disaster recovery plan must be reviewed annually or upon<br />
any material change to the business of the SD or MSP by its senior management and also by<br />
qualified, independent internal personnel or a qualified third party service. In addition,<br />
business continuity and disaster recovery plan must be reviewed by a qualified third party<br />
service at least once every 3 years. The reviews must be documented, together with any<br />
deficiencies found and corrections undertaken.<br />
(f) Conflicts of Interest. Each SD and MSP must establish and implement<br />
written policies and procedures to ensure such SD’s or MSP’s compliance with the conflicts of<br />
interest rules summarized below.<br />
(i) Restrictions on Relationship With Research Department.<br />
Personnel from the business trading unit or clearing unit of an SD or MSP cannot have any<br />
113
influence or control over the decisions of any research analyst, the content of any research<br />
reports, or the compensation of any research analyst. Any written communication between<br />
non-research personnel and the research department concerning the content of a research<br />
report must be made either through authorized legal or compliance personnel of the SD or<br />
MSP, and any such oral communication must be documented and made either through<br />
authorized legal or compliance personnel of the SD or MSP. In determining the<br />
compensation of research analysts, an SD or MSP may not consider as a factor his/her<br />
contributions to the SD’s or MSP’s trading or clearing business.<br />
(ii) Prohibition of Promise of Favorable Research. SDs or MSPs are<br />
prohibited from directly or indirectly offering favorable research, or threatening to change<br />
research, to an existing or prospective counterparty as consideration or inducement for the<br />
receipt of business of compensation.<br />
(iii) Disclosure Requirements. An SD or MSP must disclose in<br />
research reports and a research analyst must disclose in public appearances 40 (i) whether the<br />
research analyst maintains a financial interest in any derivative of a type, class or category that<br />
the research analyst follows, and the general nature of such financial interest and (ii) any<br />
other actual, material conflicts of interest of the research analyst or SD or MSP of which the<br />
research analyst has knowledge at the time of publication of the report or the time of the<br />
public appearance. Records must be maintained regarding all public appearances to<br />
document compliance with these disclosure requirements.<br />
(iv) Third Party Research Reports. If an SD or MSP distributes or<br />
makes available any independent third-party research report, it must accompany the research<br />
report with the current applicable disclosures pertaining to such SD or MSP. This requirement<br />
shall not apply to third-party reports made available by an SD or MSP to its customers upon<br />
request or through a website maintained by the SD or MSP.<br />
(v) Prohibition of Retaliation Against Research Analysts. SDs and<br />
MSPs and their employees are prohibited from directly or indirectly retaliating against or<br />
threatening to retaliate against any research analyst of such SD or MSP or any of their affiliates<br />
as a result of an adverse, negative, or otherwise unfavorable research report or public<br />
appearance written or made in good faith by the research analyst.<br />
(vi) Clearing Activities. SDs and MSPs are prohibited from directly or<br />
indirectly interfering with or attempting to influence the decision of the clearing unit of any<br />
affiliated CA or DCO to provide clearing services and activities to a particular customer. In<br />
40 "Public appearance" includes any participation in a conference call, seminar, forum (including interactive<br />
electronic forum) or other public speaking activity before 15 or more persons, or interview or appearance before<br />
one or more representatives of the media, in which a research analyst makes a recommendation or offers an<br />
opinion concerning derivatives transactions. The term "public appearance" does not include a conference call,<br />
webcast or similar event with existing customers, provided that all event participants received the most current<br />
research report or other documentation that contains all required applicable disclosures and that the analyst<br />
updates any such disclosures as necessary during the event.<br />
114
order to reasonably ensure compliance with this prohibition, each SD and MSP must create<br />
and maintain an appropriate informational partition between business trading units of the SD<br />
or MSP and clearing units of any affiliated CA or DCO.<br />
(vii) Undue Influence On Counterparties. Each SD and MSP must<br />
adopt and implement written policies and procedures that mandate the disclosure to its<br />
counterparties of any material incentives and any material conflicts of interest regarding the<br />
decision of a counterparty whether to execute a derivative on a SEF or DCM or whether to<br />
clear a derivative through a DCO.<br />
(g) General Information: Availability for Disclosure and Inspection. Each SD<br />
and MSP must make available for disclosure and inspection by the CFTC and other prudential<br />
regulators all information required by or related to the CEA and CFTC regulations. Such<br />
information must be available promptly upon request. In addition, each SD and MSP must<br />
establish and maintain reliable internal data capture, processing, storage and other<br />
operational systems sufficient to satisfy its duties under the CEA and CFTC regulations.<br />
(h) Antitrust Considerations. SDs and MSPs are prohibited from taking any<br />
action that results in any unreasonable restraint on trade, or imposes any material<br />
anticompetitive burden on trading or clearing, unless necessary or appropriate to achieve the<br />
purposes of the CEA. Each SD and MSP must adopt policies and procedures to ensure<br />
compliance with this requirement.<br />
4. Recordkeeping Rules for Swap Dealers and Major Swap Participants<br />
The CFTC has issued final rules regarding recordkeeping for SDs and MSPs, while the<br />
SEC has not yet proposed rules on this topic for SDS SDs and SDS MSPs.<br />
(a) Transaction and Position Records. Each SD and MSP must keep full,<br />
complete and systematic records (together with all pertinent data and memoranda) of all its<br />
swaps activities, including (i) records of each transaction, including all transaction documents,<br />
(ii) records of each position held by such SD or MSP, identified by product and counterparty,<br />
and including records reflecting whether each position is "long" or "short" and whether the<br />
position is cleared, (iii) records of each transaction executed on an SEF or DCM or cleared by a<br />
DCO.<br />
(b) Business Records. Each SD and MSP must keep full, complete and<br />
systematic records of all activities related to its business as an SD or MSP, including (i)<br />
governance documents, such as minutes of board meetings, organizational charts, job<br />
descriptions for managers, officers and directors, business and strategic plans for the business<br />
trading unit, and internal and external audit, risk, management, compliance and consulting<br />
reports, (ii) financial records, (iii) a record of each complaint received by the SD or MSP<br />
concerning any partner, member, officer employee or agent, and (iv) marketing and sales<br />
materials.<br />
115
(c) Records of Data Reported to SDR. With respect to each swap, each SD and<br />
MSP must retain and produce for inspection all data reported to an SDR, including the date<br />
and time the report was made.<br />
(d) Records of Real-Time Reporting Data. Each SD and MSP must retain and<br />
produce for inspection all information and data reported pursuant to the real-time reporting<br />
requirements summarized in Section III above, including the date and time the report was<br />
made.<br />
(e) Daily Trading Records. Each SD and MSP must make and keep daily<br />
trading records of all swaps it executes (including all documentation), which records must<br />
include all information necessary to conduct a comprehensive and accurate trade<br />
reconstruction. The records must be searchable by transaction and counterparty and must<br />
include:<br />
(i) pre-execution trade information including, at a minimum,<br />
records of all oral and written communications provided or received concerning quotes,<br />
solicitations, bids, offers, instructions, trading and prices that lead to the execution of a swap;<br />
(ii) execution trade information including, all terms of each swap<br />
(including terms regarding payment or settlement instructions, initial and variation margin<br />
requirements, option premiums, payment dates and any other cash flows), the trade ticket for<br />
each swap, the name of the counterparty, the date and title of each swap agreement, the<br />
price of the swap, the fees or commissions and other expenses, and any other relevant<br />
information;<br />
(iii) post-execution trade information including confirmation,<br />
termination, novation, amendment, assignment, netting, compression, reconciliation,<br />
valuation, margining, collateralization, and central clearing;<br />
(iv) ledgers reflecting payments and interest received, moneys<br />
borrowed and loans, daily calculations of current and potential future exposure for each<br />
counterparty, daily calculations of initial margin to be posed by the SD or MSP for the<br />
counterparty and by the counterparty, all transfers/substitutions of collateral, and all charges<br />
against and credits to each counterparty’s account; and<br />
(v) daily trading records for related cash and forward transactions,<br />
including all documentation.<br />
(f) Record Retention and Inspection. All records required to be kept by<br />
each SD and MSP must be kept at its principal place of business or another principal office<br />
designated by such SD or MSP. If such principal place of business is outside the U.S., then the<br />
SD or MSP must be able to provide the records to the CFTC within 72 hours of receiving a<br />
request. All records must be kept for the life of the swap plus for 5 years, and must be readily<br />
accessible. Thereafter, records must be archived for an additional 10 year period, during<br />
which they must be retrievable within 3 business days. In response to commenters, the CFTC<br />
116
educed the record retention period for voice recordings to 1 year. Records will be open to<br />
inspection by the CFTC, the Department of Justice and other prudential regulators.<br />
(g) Compliance Dates. SDs and MSPs must comply with the recordkeeping<br />
rules by the later of (i) (A) in the case of SDs and MSPs that are currently regulated by a U.S.<br />
prudential regulator or are registered with the SEC, June 1, <strong>2012</strong> and (B) in the case of SDs and<br />
MSPs that are not currently regulated by a U.S. prudential regulator and are not registered<br />
with the SEC, August 30, <strong>2012</strong>, and (ii) the date on which SDs and MSPs are required to apply<br />
for registration.<br />
5. Proposed Rules Regarding Margin Requirements for Uncleared Swaps for<br />
Swap Dealers and Major Swap Participants<br />
The CFTC has proposed rules regarding margin requirements for uncleared swaps for<br />
SDs and MSPs, while the SEC has not yet proposed rules regarding margin requirements for<br />
uncleared swaps for SDS SDs and SDS MSPs .<br />
The rationale for margin requirements is to offset the greater risk to SDs and MSPs and<br />
the financial system arising from the use of swaps that are not cleared. The CFTC’s proposing<br />
release pointed out that during the 2008 financial crisis, DCOs met all their obligations with<br />
any financial infusion from the government, while significant sums were expended as the<br />
result of losses incurred in connection with uncleared swaps, most notably at AIG. A key<br />
reason for this difference is that DCOs all use variation margin and initial margin as the<br />
centerpiece of their risk management programs while these tools were often not used in<br />
connection with uncleared swaps. Consequently, in designing the proposed margin rules for<br />
uncleared swaps, the CFTC has built upon the sound practices for risk management<br />
employed by central counterparties for decades.<br />
Variation margin entails marking open positions to their current market value each<br />
day and transferring funds between the parties to reflect any change in value since the<br />
previous time the positions were marked. This process prevents losses from accumulating<br />
over time and thereby reduces both the change of default and the size of any default should<br />
one occur.<br />
Initial margin serves as a performance bond against potential future losses. If a party<br />
fails to meet its obligations to pay variation margin, resulting in a default, the other party may<br />
use initial margin to cover most or all of any loss based on the need to replace the open<br />
position.<br />
The proposed regulations would impose requirements on SDs and MSPs for which<br />
there is no prudential regulator ("Covered Swaps Entities"), and the requirements would vary<br />
depending on the category of counterparty since different counterparties may pose different<br />
levels of risk. The proposed regulations would not impose margin requirements on nonfinancial<br />
end users.<br />
117
(a) Documentation. Each Covered Swaps Entity would be required to<br />
execute credit support documentation that would specify in advance material terms such as<br />
how margin would be calculated, what types of assets would be permitted to be posted, what<br />
margin thresholds, if any, would apply, and where margin would be held.<br />
(b) Initial Margin. On or before the date of execution of an uncleared swap<br />
between a Covered Swaps Entity and an SD or MSP, each Covered Swaps Entity must require<br />
that the counterparty post initial margin calculated as provided in the CFTC proposed rules<br />
(or if the credit support documentation requires a greater amount, such greater amount).<br />
Such initial margin must be maintained until the swap is liquidated. The CFTC proposed rules<br />
contain substantially similar initial margin requirements (with a different calculation of<br />
margin) for uncleared swaps between a Covered Swaps Entity and a financial entity.<br />
Initial Margin must be calculated using either (i) a risk based model or (ii) the<br />
alternative model. A risk based model is one that meets requirements set forth in the CFTC<br />
rules including: (i) the model is approved by the CFTC and is either currently used by a DCO<br />
for margining or cleared swaps, or is currently used by an entity subject to regular assessment<br />
by prudential regulators for margining uncleared swaps, or is made available for licensing to<br />
any market participant by a vendor, (ii) the model must have a sound theoretical basis and<br />
significant empirical support, and must use factors sufficient to measure all material risks, (iii)<br />
the model must use at least 1 year of historic price data and must incorporate a period of<br />
significant financial stress appropriate to the uncleared swaps to which the model applies, (iv)<br />
at least 99% of price changes by product and by portfolio over at least a 10-day liquidation<br />
time horizon must be covered, (v) the Covered Swaps Entity must monitor margin coverage<br />
daily, and (vi) the Covered Swaps Entity must stress test at least monthly. An alternative<br />
model may be used, which is created with reference to one used by a DCO for a similar asset<br />
class.<br />
Each Covered Swaps Entity must apply for approval from the CFTC for each model it<br />
uses. The application must include an explanation of the manner in which the model meets<br />
the regulatory requirements, the mechanics of the model, the theoretical basis of the model<br />
and empirical support for the model, and any independent third party validation of the<br />
model. The CFTC may approve or deny any such application.<br />
(c) Variation Margin. For each uncleared swap between a Covered Swaps<br />
Entity and an SD or MSP, each Covered Swaps Entity must require the counterparty to pay<br />
variation margin calculated as provided in the CFTC proposed rules. Such payment shall start<br />
on the business day after the swap is executed and continue on each business day until the<br />
swap is liquidated. The CFTC proposed rules contain substantially similar variation margin<br />
requirements (with a different calculation of margin) for uncleared swaps between a Covered<br />
Swaps Entity and a financial entity.<br />
Variation margin must be calculated using methodology that conforms to the<br />
following standards: (i) the valuation of each swap must be determined consistent with CFTC<br />
rules and (ii) the variation methodology must be stated with sufficient specificity to allow the<br />
118
counterparty, the CFTC and any applicable prudential regulator to calculate the margin<br />
requirements independently. The CFTC may at any time require a Covered Swaps Entity to<br />
modify its methodology to address potential vulnerabilities.<br />
(d) Forms of Margin. If the counterparty is an SD, MSP or financial entity, the<br />
Covered Swaps Entity shall post and accept only the following assets as initial margin: (i)<br />
immediately available cash funds denominated in U.S. dollars or the currency in which<br />
payment obligations under the swap are required to be settled, (ii) any obligation which is a<br />
direct obligation of, or fully guaranteed as to principal and interest, by the U.S. or an agency<br />
of the U.S., or (iii) any senior debt obligation of the Federal National Mortgage Association, the<br />
Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation, a Federal Home Loan Bank, the Federal<br />
Agricultural Mortgage Corporation, or any obligation that is an "insured obligation" of a Farm<br />
Credit System bank, and only the following assets as variation margin: cash or U.S. Treasury<br />
securities. If the counterparty is a non-financial entity, the Covered Swaps Entity shall post<br />
and accept only the following assets as initial margin and variation margin: any asset for<br />
which the value is reasonably ascertainable on a periodic basis in a manner agreed by the<br />
parties in the credit support documentation.<br />
Covered Swaps Entities are prohibited from collecting as initial or variation margin any<br />
asset that is an obligation of the counterparty providing such asset.<br />
Covered Swaps Entities must apply haircuts to any asset received as margin that<br />
reflect the credit and liquidity characteristics of the asset. The CFTC’s proposed rules set forth<br />
minimum haircuts that must be applied to assets received as margin if the counterparty is an<br />
SD, MSP or financial entity.<br />
The CFTC may, at any time, require a Covered Swaps Entity to replace a margin asset<br />
posted to a counterparty with a different asset to address potential risks posed by the asset,<br />
or to require a Covered Swaps Entity to require a counterparty that is an SD, MSP or financial<br />
entity to do so. The CFTC may also require modification of haircuts to address potential risks<br />
posed by the asset.<br />
6. Proposed Rules Regarding <strong>Capital</strong> Requirements for Uncleared Swaps for<br />
Swap Dealers and Major Swap Participants<br />
The CFTC has proposed rules regarding capital requirements for SDs and MSPs, while<br />
the SEC has not yet proposed rules regarding capital requirements for SDS SDs and SDS MSPs.<br />
Each SD and MSP must meet or exceed the greatest of the following regulatory capital<br />
requirements (there are modified requirements for SDs and MSPs that are subsidiaries of a<br />
U.S. bank holding company):<br />
119
(a) tangible net equity 41 in an amount equal to $20 million plus the<br />
amounts calculated for the swap dealer’s market risk exposure requirement and its OTC<br />
derivatives credit risk requirement associated with swap positions and related hedge<br />
positions that are part of the swap activities; or<br />
(b) the amount of capital required by a registered futures association of<br />
which the SD or MSP is a member.<br />
Excluded from the CFTC’s capital requirements is any SD or MSP that is subject to<br />
regulation by prudential regulators, designated by the Financial Stability Oversight Council as<br />
a systemically important institution and subject to the supervision by the Federal Reserve<br />
Board or a registered FCM.<br />
VI.<br />
MANDATORY TRADE EXECUTION REQUIREMENT; REGULATION OF SWAP EXECUTION<br />
FACILITIES AND DESIGNATED CONTRACT MARKETS<br />
The Dodd-Frank Act aimed to reduce risk, increase transparency and promote market<br />
integrity within the financial system by, among other things (i) providing for registration and<br />
comprehensive regulation of SDs and MSPs, (ii) imposing clearing and trade execution<br />
requirements on standardized derivatives products, (iii) creating robust recordkeeping and<br />
real-time reporting regimes and (iv) enhancing the CFTC’s rulemaking and enforcement<br />
authorities with respect to registered entities and intermediaries.<br />
1. Confirmation; Portfolio Reconciliation; Portfolio Compression; and<br />
Trading Relationship Documentation<br />
(a) Regulatory Overview. In commenting on the overall regulatory<br />
approach to these rules, the CFTC rejected the notion that principle-based rules should apply,<br />
insisting that the Dodd Frank Act mandated the CFTC to adopt rules that necessarily affect<br />
SDs, MSPs and their counterparties. The CFTC agreed, however, that the rules would not be<br />
applied retrospectively to swaps entered before the applicable compliance dates. The CFTC<br />
also clarified that it is not the intent of the rules to provide a basis for a counterparty to void a<br />
transaction.<br />
(b) Swap Confirmation. The CFTC has finalized rules regarding swap<br />
confirmations, while the SEC has proposed but not yet finalized rules on this topic.<br />
The President’s Working Group on Financial <strong>Markets</strong> and the U.S. Government<br />
Accountability Office have found that if new transactions are left unconfirmed, there is no<br />
definitive record of the contract terms. Thus, in the event of a dispute, the terms of an<br />
agreement must be reconstructed from other evidence, such as email trails or recorded trader<br />
conversations. This process is cumbersome and may not be wholly accurate. Disputes may<br />
41 "Tangible net equity" is determined under U.S. GAAP and excludes goodwill and other intangible assets. The<br />
CFTC proposed rules regarding capital requirements for SDs and MSPs contain rules regarding calculating tangible<br />
net equity.<br />
120
arise as to which parties are entitled to benefits and subject to burdens of any transaction,<br />
and these circumstances create significant legal and operational risk for market participants.<br />
Confirmation means the consummation of legally binding documentation (including<br />
electronic documentation) that memorializes the agreement of the counterparties to all of<br />
the terms of a swap transaction. Each SD and MSP will be required to execute a confirmation<br />
(in the case of a swap with another SD or MSP) or send an acknowledgement of such swap (in<br />
the case of a swap with a counterparty that is not an SD or MSP) as soon technologically<br />
practicable, but in any event by the end of the first business day following the day of<br />
execution. Each swap executed on an SEF or DCM will be deemed to satisfy these<br />
requirements, provided that the rules of the SEF or DCM establish that confirmation of all<br />
terms of the transaction will take place simultaneously with execution. Each swap submitted<br />
for clearing by a DCO will be deemed to satisfy these requirements, provided that the swap is<br />
submitted for clearing as soon as technologically practicable, but in any event no later than<br />
the times established for confirmations above, and confirmation of all terms takes place<br />
simultaneously with the acceptance of the swap for clearing. The CFTC confirmed that "longform<br />
confirmations", made in the absence of an executed master agreement, would be<br />
acceptable so long as the confirmation includes all terms of the trading relationship<br />
documented in writing prior to or contemporaneously with the assumption of risk arising<br />
from the swap transaction.<br />
Each SD and MSP must establish, maintain and follow written policies and procedures<br />
to ensure compliance with these requirements, which procedures must include that, upon a<br />
request by a prospective counterparty prior to the execution of any swap, the SD or MSP<br />
furnish a draft acknowledgment specifying all terms of the swap (other than the applicable<br />
pricing and other relevant terms to be agreed at execution). SDs and MSPs must conduct<br />
periodic audits sufficient to identify material weaknesses in their documentation policies and<br />
procedures.<br />
Each SD and MSP must make and retain a record of the date and time of transmission<br />
or receipt of any acknowledgment or confirmation. All records must be made available<br />
promptly upon request to the CFTC or any applicable prudential regulator.<br />
The CFTC confirmation rules provide for phase-in compliance periods of up to three<br />
years in which swap participants receive a limited degree of relief (up to seven business days<br />
for some participants) from the one business day requirement.<br />
The SEC’s proposed confirmation rules would require SBS SDs and SBS MSPs to<br />
provide their counterparties a trade acknowledgment, to provide prompt verification of the<br />
terms provided in a trade acknowledgement and to establish, maintain and enforce policies<br />
and procedures that are reasonably designed to obtain prompt verification of the terms<br />
provided in a trade acknowledgment.<br />
(c) Portfolio Reconciliation. Portfolio reconciliation is a post-execution<br />
processing and risk-management technique by which two parties to one or more swaps<br />
121
exchange the terms of all swaps in the swap portfolio between the counterparties, exchange<br />
each counterparty’s valuation of each swap in the swap portfolio and resolve any discrepancy<br />
in material terms and valuations. Portfolio reconciliation is designed to (i) identify and<br />
resolve discrepancies between the counterparties regarding the terms of a swap (either<br />
immediately after execution or during the life of the swap), (ii) ensure effective confirmation<br />
of all terms of the swap, and (iii) identify and resolve discrepancies between the<br />
counterparties regarding the valuation of the swap or the collateral held as margin. The CFTC<br />
has finalized rules regarding portfolio reconciliation, while the SEC has not yet proposed rules<br />
on this topic. The CFTC believes that for the swap market to operate efficiently and to reduce<br />
systemic risk, portfolio reconciliation should be a proactive process that delivers a<br />
consolidated view of counterparty exposure at the transaction level.<br />
Each SD and MSP must agree in writing with each of its counterparties on the terms of<br />
portfolio reconciliation. The portfolio reconciliation may be performed on a bilateral basis by<br />
the counterparties or by a qualified third party. With regard to transactions between SDs and<br />
MSPs, portfolio reconciliation must be performed no less frequently than (i) once each<br />
business day for each swap portfolio that includes 500 or more swaps, (ii) once each week for<br />
each swap portfolio that includes more than 50 but fewer than 500 swaps at any time during<br />
the calendar quarter, and (iii) once each calendar quarter for each swap portfolio that includes<br />
less than 50 swaps at any time during the calendar quarter. The requirements for swaps<br />
between an SD or MSP and a non-SD/MSP are different; a portfolio reconciliation must be<br />
performed no less frequently than (i) once each calendar quarter for each swap portfolio that<br />
includes more than 100 swaps at any time during the calendar quarter and (ii) once annually<br />
for each swap portfolio that includes less than 100 swaps at any time during the calendar<br />
year.<br />
Any discrepancy in a material term must be resolved immediately. Each SD and MSP<br />
must establish, maintain and follow policies and procedures reasonably designed to resolve<br />
any discrepancy in valuation as soon as possible, but in any event within 5 business days. A<br />
less than 10% valuation difference need not be deemed a discrepancy.<br />
SDs and MSPs will be required to promptly notify the CFTC or any other prudential<br />
regulator of any swap valuation dispute in excess of $20 million (or its equivalent in any<br />
currency) that is not resolved within 3 business days (if the dispute is with a counterparty that<br />
is an SD or MSP) or 5 business days (if the dispute is with a counterparty that is not an SD or<br />
MSP).<br />
DCO.<br />
The above portfolio reconciliation requirements do not apply to swaps cleared by a<br />
(d) Portfolio Compression. The Dodd-Frank Act tasked the CFTC with<br />
implementing regulations for the timely and accurate processing and netting of all swaps<br />
entered into by SDs and MSPs. Portfolio compression is a post-trade processing and netting<br />
mechanism whereby substantially similar transactions among two or more counterparties are<br />
terminated and replaced with a smaller number of transactions where combined notional<br />
122
value is less than the combined notional value of the terminated swaps. Portfolio<br />
compression requirements have been adopted in an effort to reduce the risk, cost and<br />
inefficiency of maintaining unnecessary transactions on the counterparties’ books. The use of<br />
portfolio compression as a risk management tool has been widely acknowledged. The<br />
President’s Working Group on Financial Policy identified frequent portfolio compression of<br />
outstanding trades a key policy objective in the effort to strengthen OTC derivatives market<br />
infrastructure. The CFTC has finalized rules regarding portfolio compression, while the SEC<br />
has not yet proposed rules on this topic.<br />
Each SD and MSP must establish, maintain and follow written policies and procedures<br />
pertaining to counterparties that are also SDs and MSPs (i) for terminating each fully<br />
offsetting swap in a timely fashion, when appropriate, and (ii) for periodically engaging in<br />
bilateral and multilateral portfolio compression exercises, when appropriate; and pertaining<br />
to non-SD/MSP counterparties, (y) for periodically terminating fully offsetting swaps and (z)<br />
for engaging in portfolio compression exercises to the extent requested by any counterparty.<br />
Each SD and MSP must maintain complete and accurate records of each bilateral offset and<br />
each bilateral or multilateral portfolio compression exercise in which it participates, and such<br />
records must be available upon request to the CFTC and other prudential regulators.<br />
The portfolio compression requirements do not apply to any swap that is cleared with<br />
a DCO.<br />
(e) Trading Relationship Documentation. The Dodd-Frank Act tasked the<br />
CFTC with enacting regulations relating to the trading relationship documentation that SDs<br />
and MSPs must enter into with their counterparties in order to establish a swap trading<br />
relationship and document the swap transactions that occur pursuant to that relationship.<br />
Accordingly, the CFTC has enacted rules on this topic (the SEC has not yet proposed rules on<br />
this topic). In addition to swap confirmations, the trading relationship documentation shall<br />
be executed prior to or contemporaneously with a swap transaction.<br />
As explained in the preamble to the CFTC’s proposal regarding trade documentation<br />
rules, the OTC derivatives markets traditionally have been characterized by privately<br />
negotiated transactions entered into by two counterparties, in which each party assumes and<br />
manages the credit risk of the other. Because a relatively small number of dealers are the<br />
most significantly active participants in the derivatives market, the default of such a dealer<br />
may result in significant losses for the counterparties of that dealer, either from the<br />
counterparty exposure to the defaulting dealer or from the cost of replacing the defaulted<br />
trades in times of market stress. One important method of addressing the credit risk that<br />
arises from OTC derivatives transactions is the use of bilateral close-out netting. Following<br />
the occurrence of a default by one of the counterparties (such as bankruptcy or insolvency),<br />
the exposures from individual transactions between the two parties are netted and<br />
consolidated into a single net "lump sum" obligation. That exposure then may be offset by<br />
the available collateral previously provided. Therefore, it is important that netting provisions<br />
are legally enforceable and collateral may be used to meet the netting exposure. There is also<br />
a risk that inadequate documentation of open swap transactions could result in collateral and<br />
123
legal disputes, thereby exposing counterparties to significant counterparty risk. In addition,<br />
according to the regulators, increasing standardization of swap documentation should<br />
improve the market in a number of ways, including: facilitating automated processing of<br />
transactions; increasing the fungibility of the contracts; improving valuation and risk<br />
management; increasing the reliability of price information; reducing the number of<br />
problems in matching trades; and facilitating reporting of data to SDRs. Product and process<br />
standardization are also key conditions for increased automation and central clearing of OTC<br />
derivatives.<br />
OTC derivatives market participants typically use industry standard documentation,<br />
such as the ISDA Master Agreement. In large part, the CFTC’s rules reflect existing trading<br />
relationship documentation between counterparties, such as the widely-used ISDA Master<br />
Agreement, but do contain additional documentation requirements.<br />
Each SD and MSP must establish, maintain and follow written policies and procedures<br />
reasonably designed to ensure that the SD or MSP executes written swap trading relationship<br />
documentation with its counterparty that complies with the CFTC’s requirements<br />
summarized below. These policies and procedures must be approved in writing by senior<br />
management of the SD or MSP.<br />
The trading relationship documentation must be in writing and must include:<br />
(i) all terms governing the trading relationship, including terms<br />
addressing payment obligations, netting of payments, events of default or other termination<br />
events, calculation and netting of obligations upon termination, transfer of rights and<br />
obligations, governing law, valuation and dispute resolution;<br />
(ii) credit support arrangements, including initial and variation<br />
margin requirements, the types of assets that may be used as margin and asset valuation<br />
haircuts, investment and rehypothecation terms for assets used as margin for uncleared<br />
swaps, if any, and custodial arrangements for margin assets;<br />
(iii) the process for determining the value of each swap at the time<br />
of execution to termination, maturity or expiration of such swap;<br />
(iv) a provision that confirms both parties’ understanding of how the<br />
new orderly liquidation authority under Title II of the Dodd-Frank Act and the Federal Deposit<br />
Insurance Act may affect their portfolios of uncleared, bilateral swaps; and<br />
(v) notice that (i) upon acceptance of a swap by a DCO, the original<br />
swap is extinguished and replaced by equal and opposite swaps with the DCO and (ii) all<br />
terms of the swap must confirm to the product specifications established by the DCO.<br />
The trading relationship documentation policies and procedures of each SD and MSP<br />
must be periodically audited by an independent internal or external auditor to identify any<br />
124
material weakness. A record of each audit must be retained and must be available upon<br />
request to the CFTC and other applicable prudential regulators.<br />
The trading relationship documentation requirements do not apply to swaps executed<br />
prior to October 15, <strong>2012</strong>. The trade documentation requirements also do not apply to any<br />
swap that is traded on a DCM or executed on an SEF, if such swap is also cleared with a DCO<br />
and all terms of the swap conform to the rules of the DCO for futures and option contracts.<br />
2. Proposed Rules Regarding Position Limits<br />
The Dodd-Frank Act tasked the CFTC with establishing position limits (that is,<br />
thresholds that restrict the number of speculative positions that a person may hold) for<br />
exempt commodities 42 and for agricultural commodities traded on a DCM, as well as swaps<br />
that are economically equivalent to such futures or options traded on a DCM. In addition, the<br />
CFTC was tasked with establishing aggregate position limits for contracts based on the same<br />
underlying commodity that include, in addition to futures and options contracts (i) contracts<br />
listed by DCMs, (ii) swaps that are not traded on a registered entity but which are determined<br />
to perform or affect a "significant price discovery function", and (iii) foreign board of trade<br />
("FBOT") contracts that are price-linked to a DCM or SEF contract and made available for<br />
trading on the FBOT by direct access from within the U.S. The CFTC has issued final rules<br />
regarding position limits (the "Position Limits Rules").<br />
(a) Position Limits. The Position Limits Rules set limits for net speculative<br />
positions (long or short) that a trader may hold (even on an intraday basis) of (i) 28 specified<br />
physical commodity futures contracts (the "Core Referenced Futures Contracts"), (ii) options<br />
on those futures contracts, and (iii) economically equivalent 43 swaps (collectively, the<br />
"Referenced Contracts"). The CFTC has selected those 28 futures contracts as Core Referenced<br />
Futures Contracts because they are have high levels of open interest and significant notional<br />
value or serve as a reference price for a significant number of cash market transactions. 44 The<br />
42 A commodity is a product, which is of uniform quality and traded across various markets. There are generally<br />
two types of commodities, ‘hard commodities’ and ‘soft commodities’. Hard commodities include crude oil, iron<br />
ore, gold, and silver and have a long shelf life. Agricultural products such as soybean, rice or wheat, are considered<br />
‘soft commodities’ since they have a limited shelf life. These commodities have to be similar and interchangeable<br />
or ‘fungible’.<br />
43 A swap will be deemed "economically equivalent" if it is (i) a "look‐alike" contract (i.e., it settles off of the Core<br />
Referenced Futures Contract or contracts that are based on the same commodity for the same delivery location as<br />
the Core Referenced Futures Contract), (ii) a contract with a reference price based on only the combination of at<br />
least one Referenced Contract price and one or more prices in the same or substantially the same commodity as<br />
that underlying the relevant Core Referenced Futures Contract, provided that such a contract is not a locational<br />
basis swap, (iii) an intercommodity spread contract with two reference price components, one or both of which<br />
are based on Referenced Contracts, or (iv) priced at a fixed differential to a Core Referenced Futures Contract.<br />
44 The commodities subject to the position limits rules include: (i) nine agricultural legacy products with existing<br />
limits (corn, cotton, oats, soybeans, soybean meal, soybean oil) and three wheat contracts that are traded in<br />
Chicago, Kansas City and Minneapolis; (ii) ten additional agricultural products (milk, feeder cattle, live cattle, lean<br />
hogs, rough rice, cocoa, coffee, frozen concentrate orange juice and two sugar contracts); (iii) four energy products<br />
(crude oil, gasoline, heating oil, and Henry Hub natural gas; and (iv) five metals (copper, gold, silver, palladium and<br />
platinum). Excluded from the definition of "Referenced Contracts" are (i) basis contracts (i.e., contracts based on<br />
125
Position Limits Rules also mandate that DCMs and SEFs set position limits for agricultural<br />
commodity contracts and permit the establishment of position limits for excluded<br />
commodities.<br />
(b) Spot-Month Position Limits and Non- Spot-Month Position Limits.<br />
Speculative position limits will apply in two types: (i) spot-month position limits and (ii) nonspot<br />
month position limits. Traders will be required to comply with both types of limits on an<br />
intra-day basis.<br />
Spot-month limits apply in the last days of trading immediately preceding the delivery<br />
period. The length of this trading period (or "spot month") varies depending on the contract.<br />
Spot-month limits for physically-delivered and cash-settled contracts will be based on 25% of<br />
estimated deliverable supply for a Core Referenced Futures Contract in the same commodity.<br />
This is consistent with long-standing practices of DCMs. The CFTC has set initial spot-month<br />
limits for physically-delivered Core Referenced Futures Contracts at the same levels as are<br />
now set by the DCMs with cash-settled Referenced Contracts subject to equivalent limits.<br />
These initial spot-month limits will go into effect on December 11, <strong>2012</strong>. The initial spotmonth<br />
limits rules for cash-settled contracts have been adopted on an interim basis in order<br />
for the CFTC to solicit additional comments on the appropriate level of spot-month limits for<br />
cash-settled contracts. Spot-month limits will be updated annually for agricultural contracts<br />
and every 2 years for energy and metals contracts, based on the estimates of deliverable<br />
supply that DCMs will be required to submit on specific staggered dates for each Core<br />
Referenced Futures Contract.<br />
Non-spot-month position limits apply to positions held by an individual market<br />
participant in all contract months combined or in a single contract month and will generally<br />
be set at 10% of open interest in the first 25,000 contracts and 2.5% of the open interest<br />
thereafter. 45 This is consistent with the CFTC’s historical approach to setting non-spot-month<br />
speculative position limits for certain agricultural commodity futures and options. The CFTC<br />
expects that the formula will yield limits capable of preventing a speculative trader from<br />
acquiring excessively large positions while ensuring sufficient liquidity for bona fide hedgers<br />
and avoiding disruption to the price discovery process. The CFTC did not adopt separate<br />
limits for different classes of transactions (i.e., swaps, futures, options on futures), so<br />
compliance with non-spot month position limits will be determined using a trader’s net<br />
speculative position with respect to a particular commodity across its aggregate positions in<br />
Core Referenced Futures Contracts and economically equivalent options on futures and<br />
swaps.<br />
the difference in the price of a commodity (or substantially the same commodity) at different delivery locations)<br />
and (ii) commodity index contracts, which are indexes comprised of prices of commodities that are not the same or<br />
substantially the same. This means that diversified commodity index positions are not subject to the position<br />
limits, but single commodity index contracts are subject to the position limits.<br />
45 The Position Limit Rules establish a different approach for setting non‐spot‐month limits in "legacy" agricultural<br />
Referenced Contracts that are currently subject to CFTC limits.<br />
126
The initial non-spot-month limits (single-month and all-months-combined) will be<br />
imposed within 1 month of the CFTC’s receipt of 1 year of swaps open interest data under the<br />
CFTC’s new swaps large trader reporting rules (which went into effect on November 21, 2011).<br />
The non-spot-month limits will be adjusted every 2 years by applying the 10/2.5% formula to<br />
the higher of (i) the average open interest level in the most recent calendar year (ii) the<br />
average open interest level in the most recent 2 calendar years.<br />
(c) Netting. For purposes of determining compliance with the spot-month<br />
class limits, traders are permitted to net within each class of contract, but may not net across<br />
physical-delivery and cash-settled contracts. For example, if the spot-month-limit (applying<br />
separately to physically-delivered and cash-settled contracts) is 100 contracts and a trader<br />
holds 50 long cash-settled contracts, 100 short cash-settled contracts and 100 long<br />
physically-delivered contracts, then the trader could net the long and short cash-settled<br />
contracts.<br />
For purposes of determining compliance with the non-spot-month class limits, market<br />
participants will be permitted to net futures/options positions against economically<br />
equivalent swaps.<br />
(d) Exemption from Position Limits for "Bona Fide Hedges". Contracts that are<br />
"bona fide hedges" are exempt from the position limits, provided that a trader files notice<br />
with the CFTC to claim the exemption. The CFTC has narrowed the definition of bona fide<br />
hedging for purposes of the Position Limits Rules. Bona fide hedging is limited to positions (i)<br />
that represent a substitute for transactions made or to be made or positions taken or to be<br />
taken at a later time in a physical marketing channel, (ii) that are economically appropriate to<br />
the reduction of risks in the conduct and management of a commercial enterprise and (iii)<br />
that arise from a potential change in value in assets, liabilities or services, or (iv) reduce risk<br />
attendant to a position resulting from a swap executed opposite a counterparty for which the<br />
transaction qualifies as a bona fide hedging transaction under the preceding criteria. These<br />
bona fide hedging rules are limited to enumerated hedging transactions and positions set<br />
forth in the rule.<br />
The CFTC’s pre-existing and broader definition of bona fide hedging in Regulation<br />
1.3(z) will continue to apply only to excluded commodities.<br />
(e) Exemption for Preexisting Positions. The Positions Limits Rules provide a<br />
limited exemption from compliance with non-spot-month limits (but not spot-month for<br />
preexisting positions that are in excess of the established limits, provided that they were<br />
established in good faith prior to January 17, <strong>2012</strong> (the effective date of the Positions Limits<br />
Rules). A trader would not be allowed to enter into new, additional contracts in the same<br />
direction, but could enter into offsetting positions and thus reduce its net position. The<br />
Positions Limits Rules also permit SDs to continue to rely on the regulatory exemption (now<br />
repealed) for open swaps, so that SDs may continue to manage the risk of their swap portfolio<br />
that exists at the time of implementation of the new position limits. New swaps would need<br />
127
to comply with the new requirements for the bona fide hedging exemption in order to be<br />
excluded from the determination of the SD’s position.<br />
(f) Aggregation of Positions. The speculative position limits apply to a<br />
single trader and to a group of affiliated traders. If two or more traders are acting pursuant to<br />
an express or implied agreement or understanding then the positions held by such traders<br />
will be treated the same as if held by a single trader. Each trader will be required to aggregate<br />
all positions in accounts for which the trader (i) directly or indirectly holds an ownership or<br />
equity interest of 10% or greater, (ii) controls trading, by power of attorney or otherwise, or<br />
(iii) has any interest and such accounts use identical trading strategies to those other owned<br />
or controlled accounts.<br />
(i) Commodity Pools. Position limits related to interests in<br />
commodity pools are exempt from the aggregation requirement. This means that, except for<br />
a pool’s commodity pool operator, a participant in a commodity pool need not aggregate the<br />
commodity pool’s positions with the participant’s own positions held outside the pool, as<br />
long as the participant does not control the commodity pool’s trading decisions and the<br />
participant and the pool do not use identical trading strategies. This also applies for a trader<br />
who is a principal or affiliate of a pool’s commodity pool operator, so long as the trader does<br />
not control or supervise the commodity pool’s trading and the commodity pool operator has<br />
proper informational barriers between the commodity pool’s trading and the trader.<br />
However, participants with a 25% interest in a commodity pool operated by the exempt<br />
commodity pool operator must aggregate the pool accounts or positions.<br />
(ii) Independent Account Controllers. An "eligible entity" (which<br />
includes mutual funds, banks, commodity pool operators, commodity trading advisors and<br />
insurance companies or affiliates of the foregoing) is not required to aggregate with its<br />
proprietary positions those client positions that are managed by an independent account<br />
controller ("IAC"), provided that the eligible entity has "minimum control" over the trading<br />
and the IAC must: (i) trade independently 46 of the eligible entity and of any other IAC trading<br />
for the eligible entity, (ii) have no knowledge of the trading decisions by any other IAC, and<br />
(iii) be registered as a futures commission merchant, introducing broker, commodity trading<br />
advisor, or as an associated person of any of the foregoing, or be a general partner of a<br />
commodity pool whose operator is exempt from commodity pool operator exemption.<br />
However, the positions of all IACs must be aggregated during the spot month in a physicaldelivery<br />
Referenced Contract. If the IAC is an affiliate of the eligible entity, additional<br />
requirements apply, including blocking procedures and independent trading systems.<br />
46 In determining whether an IAC "trades independently", the CFTC will consider the degree to which there is a<br />
functional separation (i) between the proprietary trading desk of the eligible entity and the IAC’s trading<br />
operations and (ii) between the research functions supporting an eligible entity’s proprietary trading desk and<br />
those supporting the IAC’s trading decisions. Additional requirements apply if the IAC is affiliated with the eligible<br />
entity or another IAC.<br />
128
The IAC itself must aggregate, like every other trader, all of the speculative positions in<br />
accounts in which it owns at least 10%, for which it controls trading, or in which it has any<br />
interest and which uses identical trading strategies.<br />
(iii) Affiliates. Generally, a trader will be required to aggregate all<br />
accounts in which it directly or indirectly has a 10% or greater ownership or equity interest.<br />
Two exceptions apply: a trader will not be required to so aggregate accounts if (i) such 10%<br />
threshold is associated with underwriting securities or (ii) aggregation across commonlyowned<br />
affiliates (above the 10% ownership threshold) would require sharing position<br />
information that could result in the violation of federal law (use of this exemption requires<br />
notice to the CFTC and an opinion of counsel). However, if a trader has actual knowledge of<br />
the positions of an affiliate, the trader will be required to aggregate all such positions. This<br />
implies that a trader relying on this provision must maintain information barriers between<br />
itself and its affiliates.<br />
(iv) Proposed Exemption From Aggregation Requirement. After<br />
enacting the Position Limits Rules, the CFTC proposed revisions to the aggregation<br />
requirement. Specifically, the proposed rules would provide an exemption from the<br />
aggregation requirement to a person with an ownership or equity interest in an owned entity<br />
of at least 10% but not greater than 50%, provided that an appropriate firewall exists between<br />
the entities, including the following: (i) each must trade pursuant to separately developed,<br />
independent trading systems, (ii) each must maintain risk management systems that do not<br />
allow it to share trades or trading strategies with the other, (iii) neither may have knowledge<br />
of the other’s trading decisions, (iv) each must have in place and enforce written policies and<br />
procedures to preclude having knowledge of, gaining access to, or receiving data about the<br />
other’s trades, (v) the person and the owned entity may not share employees that control the<br />
trading decisions of either the person or the owned entity, (vi) the person’s ownership or<br />
equity interests in the owned entity may not exceed 50%, and (vii) the person must make a<br />
prior notice filing with the CFTC.<br />
(g) Foreign Boards of Trade. The Position Limits Rules apply to a trader’s<br />
positions in referenced contracts executed on, or pursuant to the rules of, an FBOT, if: (i) the<br />
contract, agreement, or transaction must settle against the price of a contract executed or<br />
cleared pursuant to the rules of a U.S. commodities exchange, and (ii) the FBOT makes such<br />
linked contracts available to its members or other participants located in the U.S. by direct<br />
access to its electronic trading and order matching system.<br />
(h) Position Limits Set by Registered Entities. The Position Limits Rules require<br />
each commodity exchange (an SEF or DCM) in the U.S. to establish hard position limits for<br />
Referenced Contracts that are no higher than those set by the Position Limits Rules. For non-<br />
Referenced Contracts (which would include interest rate spas and other swaps unrelated to<br />
Referenced Contracts), exchanges may adopt the CFTC’s general formula for establishing<br />
position limits. As an alternative to such limits, an exchange has discretion to establish<br />
accountability levels.<br />
129
3. Registration of Foreign Boards of Trade<br />
An FBOT, as defined in the CFTC’s rules, is any foreign board of trade, exchange or<br />
market located outside the U.S., its territories or possessions, whether incorporated or not<br />
incorporated. Under the CFTC’s rules, it will be unlawful for an FBOT to provide to U.S.<br />
persons direct access to its electronic trading and order matching system unless and it is<br />
registered with the CFTC. Only eligible 47 FBOTs may be registered.<br />
Once an FBOT is registered with the CFTC, its members and other participants will be<br />
able to enter trades directly into the trading and order matching system of the FBOT, to the<br />
extent that such members or other participants are (i) entering orders for the member’s or<br />
other participant’s proprietary accounts, (ii) registered with the CFTC as FCMs and are<br />
submitting customer orders to the trading system for execution, or (iii) registered with the<br />
CFTC as commodity pool operators or commodity trader advisers (or are exempt from such<br />
registration) and are submitting orders for execution on behalf of a U.S. pool that the member<br />
or participant operates, or an account of a U.S. customer for which the member or participant<br />
has discretionary authority, provided that an FCM (or a firm exempt from registration as an<br />
FCM) acts as clearing firm and guarantees, without limitation, all such trades of the<br />
commodity pool operators or commodity trader advisers effected through submission of<br />
orders to the trading system.<br />
In order to continue to be registered with the CFTC, an FBOT must comply with the<br />
U.S. regulatory requirements and international standards.<br />
The rule regarding FBOT registration became effective on February 11, <strong>2012</strong>. Any<br />
FBOT that was operating under existing no-action relief as of the effective date of these rules<br />
must now register with the CFTC in order to continue to provide direct access to its electronic<br />
trading and order matching system.<br />
4. Proposed Rules Regarding Core Principles for SEFs and SBS SEFs<br />
The Dodd-Frank Act provides that no person may operate a facility for the trading or<br />
processing of swaps, unless the facility is registered as a SEF/SBS SEF or a DCM/securities<br />
exchange. In order to be registered and maintain registration, (x) an SEF must comply with<br />
core principles (and any additional requirements imposed by the CFTC) and (y) an SBS SEF<br />
must comply with core principles (and any additional requirements imposed by the SEC).<br />
47 An FBOT is eligible for registration with the CFTC if (i) the FBOT and its clearing organization (where applicable)<br />
satisfy certain requirements (or alternatively, the clearing organization is a registered DCO), (ii) the FBOT possesses<br />
the attributes of an established, organized exchange, (ii) the FBOT adheres to appropriate rules prohibiting abusive<br />
practices, (iii) the FBOT enforces appropriate rules to maintain market and financial integrity, (iv) the FBOT has<br />
been authorized by a regulatory process that examines customer and market protections, and (v) the FBOT is<br />
subject to continued oversight by a regulator that has power to intervene in the market and the authority to share<br />
information with the CFTC.<br />
130
The CFTC and SEC issued proposed rules regarding core principles for SEFs and SBS<br />
SEFs, respectively, which seek to clarify which entities may qualify as SEFs and also to codify<br />
and clarify the core principles established by the Dodd-Frank Act.<br />
The CFTC’s proposed rules regarding SEFs (the "CFTC Proposed SEF Rules") apply to<br />
every SEF that is registered, has been registered or is applying to be registered with the CFTC.<br />
The CFTC Proposed SEF Rules provide that a transaction entered into or pursuant to the rules<br />
of a registered SEF will not be void, voidable, subject to rescission or otherwise invalidated or<br />
rendered unenforceable if the SEF violates these rules or if any CFTC proceeding requires the<br />
SEF to alter, supplement or adopt a specific term or condition.<br />
(a) Prohibited Use of Data Collected. Under the CFTC Proposed SEF Rules, an<br />
SEF will be prohibited from using for business or marketing purposes any proprietary data or<br />
personal information it collects or receives, from or on behalf of any person, for the purposes<br />
of fulfilling its regulatory obligations, provided however that an SEF, where necessary, may<br />
share such information with one or more SEFs or DCMs registered with the CFTC, for<br />
regulatory purposes.<br />
(b) Boards of Trade Operating Both a DCM and an SEF. Under the CFTC<br />
Proposed SEF Rules, a board of trade that operates a DCM and intends to also operate an SEF<br />
must separately register the SEF with the CFTC and comply with the core principles for SEFs.<br />
If such board of trade uses the same electronic trade execution system for executing and<br />
trading swaps that uses for executed and trading swaps on the DCM, it must clearly identify<br />
to market participants for each swap whether the execution or trading of such swap is taking<br />
place on the DCM or on the SEF.<br />
(c) Permitted Methods of Execution. Under the CFTC Proposed SEF Rules, an<br />
applicant seeking registration as an SEF must, at a minimum, offer trading services for<br />
required transactions (those that are required to be executed and are made available for<br />
trading, and are not block trades) with the ability to post both firm and indicative quotes on a<br />
centralized electronic system accessible to all market participants who have access to the SEF.<br />
SEFs must require that traders who have the ability to execute against a customer’s<br />
order or to execute 2 customers against each other be subject to a 15 second timing delay<br />
between the entry of those two orders, such that one side of the potential transaction is<br />
disclosed and made available to the other market participant before the second side of the<br />
potential transaction is submitted for execution.<br />
Transactions that are block trades, are not swaps subject to mandatory clearing and<br />
execution requirements or are illiquid or bespoke may be executed in accordance with<br />
methods prescribed by the CFTC in the proposed rules or any other system for trading<br />
permitted by the CFTC.<br />
(d) Swaps Available for Trading. Under the CFTC Proposed SEF Rules, an SEF<br />
must conduct an annual review of whether it has made a swap product available for trading.<br />
When conducting reviews, the SEF may consider the frequency of transactions in this or<br />
131
similar swaps, the open interest in this or similar swaps, and any other factors requested by<br />
the CFTC. If at least one SEF has made the same or an economically equivalent swap available<br />
for trading, all SEFs will be required to treat the swap as made available for trading.<br />
(e) Identification of Non-Cleared Swaps or Swaps Not Made Available to Trade.<br />
Under the CFTC Proposed SEF Rules, an SEF may allow the execution and trading of swaps<br />
that are not subject to the mandatory clearing requirement or swaps that have not been<br />
made available for trading. If the SEF chooses to offer to facilitate bilateral trading of such<br />
swaps, it must clearly identify to market participants that the particular swap is to be<br />
executed bilaterally between the parties pursuant to one of the applicable exemptions from<br />
execution and clearing.<br />
(f) Core Principles. For purposes of convenience, the core principles set<br />
forth in the CFTC Proposed SEF Rules are summarized below and, unless indicated otherwise,<br />
the SEC’s proposed rules regarding core principles for SBS SEFs are substantially similar.<br />
To maintain registration with the CFTC, an SEF must comply with all core principles<br />
summarized below and all other regulatory requirements:<br />
(i) Compliance with Rules. Each SEF must (i) establish and enforce<br />
compliance with any rule of the SEF, (ii) establish and enforce trading, trade processing, and<br />
participation rules that will deter abuses and have the capacity to detect, investigate and<br />
enforce those rules, (iii) establish rules governing the operation of the facility, including rules<br />
specifying trading procedures to be followed by members and market participants when<br />
entering and executing orders traded or posed on the SEF (including block trades), (iv)<br />
establish procedures to capture and retain information that may be used in establishing<br />
whether rule violations have occurred, and (v) provide any eligible contract participant (ECP)<br />
and any independent software vendor with impartial access to its market(s) and market<br />
services (including any indicative quote screens or any similar pricing data displays).<br />
(ii) SEF May Permit Trading Only in Swaps That Are Not Susceptible<br />
to Manipulation. In order to demonstrate compliance with this requirement, an SEF must<br />
submit new swap contracts in advance to the CFTC either by requesting prior approval or selfcertification<br />
for the new product submission.<br />
(iii) Monitoring of Trading and Trade Processing. Each SEF must (i)<br />
establish and enforce rules or terms and conditions defining or specifications detailing<br />
trading procedures and procedures for trade processing of swaps, (ii) monitor trading in<br />
swaps to prevent manipulation, price distortion, and disruptions of the delivery or cash<br />
settlement process through surveillance, compliance and disciplinary practices and<br />
procedures and (iii) establish and maintain risk control mechanisms to reduce the potential<br />
risk of market disruptions.<br />
(iv) Ability to Obtain Information. Each SEF must establish and<br />
enforce rules that will allow it to obtain any necessary information to perform any of its<br />
132
equisite functions, and must provide such information upon request by the CFTC to the CFTC<br />
or for international information-sharing.<br />
(v) Position Limits or Accountability. Each SEF that is a trading<br />
facility must adopt for each of its contracts, as is necessary or appropriate, speculative<br />
position limitations or position accountability standards for speculation.<br />
(vi) Financial Integrity of Transactions - each SEF must establish and<br />
enforce rules and procedures for ensuring the financial integrity of swaps entered on or<br />
through the facilities of the SEF, including the clearance and settlement of the swap, by (i)<br />
establishing and monitoring compliance with minimum financial standards for its members<br />
(which, at a minimum, require members to qualify as ECPs), (ii) for cleared transactions,<br />
ensuring the SEF has the capacity to route transactions to the DCO in a manner acceptable to<br />
the DCO for purposes of ongoing risk management, and (iii) for uncleared transactions,<br />
requiring members to demonstrate that they have entered into credit arrangement<br />
documentation for the transaction, have ability to exchange collateral and meet any credit<br />
filters that may be adopted by the SEF.<br />
(vii) Emergency Authority. Each SEF must adopt rules to provide for<br />
the exercise of emergency authority, in consultation and cooperation with the CFTC, as<br />
necessary and appropriate, including the authority to liquidate or transfer open positions in<br />
any swap or to suspend or curtail trading in a swap.<br />
(viii) Timely Publication of Trading Information. Each SEF must make<br />
public timely information on price, trading volume, and other trading data on swaps to the<br />
extent prescribed by the CFTC.<br />
(ix) Recordkeeping and Reporting - each SEF is required to maintain<br />
records of all activities relating to the business of the facility for a period of 5 years and to<br />
report such information to the CFTC; the CFTC will adopt further data collection and reporting<br />
requirements for SEFs, which will be comparable to those imposed on DCOs and SDRs.<br />
(x) Antitrust Considerations. Unless necessary and appropriate to<br />
achieve the purposes of the CEA, SEFs are prohibited from adopting any rules or taking any<br />
actions that result in any unreasonable restraint on trade or impose any material<br />
anticompetitive burden on trading or clearing;<br />
(xi) Conflicts of Interest. Each SEF must establish and enforce rules<br />
to minimize conflicts of interest in its decision-making process and establish a process for<br />
resolving conflicts of interest.<br />
(xii) Financial Resources. Each SEF is required to have adequate<br />
financial, operational and managerial resources to discharge its responsibilities; the financial<br />
resources of an SEF will be considered adequate if (i) their value exceeds the total amount<br />
that would enable the SEF to cover its operating costs for a 1 year period, as calculated on a<br />
rolling basis and (ii) the financial resources include unencumbered, liquid financial assets (i.e.,<br />
133
cash and highly liquid securities) equal to at least 6 months’ operating costs; SEFs will be<br />
required to provide quarterly reports to the CFTC regarding their financial resources.<br />
(xiii) System Safeguards. Each SEF is required to establish and<br />
maintain (i) a program of risk analysis and oversight to identify and minimize sources of<br />
operational risk through the development of appropriate controls and procedures and the<br />
development of automated systems that are reliable, secure and have adequate scalable<br />
capacity, and (ii) emergency procedures, backup facilities and a plan for disaster recovery that<br />
allow for the timely recovery and resumption of operations and the fulfillment of the SEF’s<br />
responsibilities and obligations; the SEF must conduct periodic tests to verify that backup<br />
resources are sufficient.<br />
(xiv) Designation of chief compliance officer - each SEF must<br />
designate a chief compliance officer who will review compliance with the core principles and<br />
will report directly to the board or senior officer of the facility.<br />
SEFs will be permitted to contract with a registered futures association or another<br />
registered entity for the provision of services to assist it in complying with the core principles,<br />
however the SEF will at all times remain responsible for its compliance. The SEF must ensure<br />
that its service provider has the capacity and resources necessary to provide timely and<br />
effective regulatory services and will have a duty to supervise the service provider.<br />
5. Proposed Rules Regarding Core Principles for DCMs<br />
The Dodd-Frank Act amended the CEA to revise the existing core principles applicable<br />
to DCMs and to add five additional core principles for DCMs (making a total of 23 core<br />
principles). The CFTC has issued final rules regarding core principles for DCMs.<br />
Each board of trade seeking designation as a DCM must apply with the CFTC. Each<br />
applicant must either submit for approval to the CFTC all of its operational rules and the<br />
terms and conditions of futures, swaps and option products listed for trading on the facility,<br />
or otherwise submit to the CFTC a certification that all of its rules comply with the CEA and<br />
CFTC regulations.<br />
(a) Information Relating to Contract Market Compliance. Upon request by<br />
the CFTC, a DCM must file with the CFTC (i) information related to its business as a DCM,<br />
including information relating to data entry and trade details and (ii) a written demonstration,<br />
containing supporting data, information and documents, that the DCM is in compliance with<br />
the core principles. Each DCM must report to the CFTC the transfer of 10% or more of the<br />
equity in such DCM.<br />
(b) Prohibited Use of Data Collected. A DCM is prohibited from using for<br />
business or marketing purposes any proprietary data or personal information it collects or<br />
receives, from or on behalf of any person, for the purpose of fulfilling its regulatory<br />
obligations; provided however, that a DCM may use such data and information for business or<br />
marketing purposes if the person from whom it collects or receives such data or information<br />
134
clearly consents to such use. A DCM may not condition access to its trading facility on a<br />
market participant’s consent to the use of proprietary data or personal information for<br />
business or marketing purposes. In addition, a DCM may, where necessary for regulatory<br />
purposes, share such data or information with other DCMs or SEFs registered with the CFTC.<br />
(c) Listing of Swaps on a DCM. When a DCM lists for the first time a swap<br />
contract for trading, it must either prior to or at the time of such listing, detail in writing to the<br />
CFTC written how the DCM is addressing its self-regulatory obligations and is fulfilling its<br />
statutory and regulatory obligations with respect to the swap transaction.<br />
(d) Core Principles. The core principles applicable to DCMs are substantially<br />
similar to the core principles proposed for SEFs, as summarized above.<br />
(e) Compliance Date. DCMs must comply with the CFTC’s core principles<br />
rules by October 17, <strong>2012</strong> (other than the core principle requiring open access, which has a<br />
different compliance date).<br />
VII.<br />
CROSS-BORDER APPLICATION OF SWAPS RULES<br />
1. Cross-Border Framework<br />
The CFTC has proposed interpretative guidance and a policy statement regarding the<br />
extraterritorial reach of the swaps provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act and swaps regulations<br />
promulgated by the CFTC (the "Proposed Cross-Border Guidance"), while the SEC has not yet<br />
done so. The Dodd-Frank Act stated that its provisions will not apply to activities outside the<br />
U.S. unless (i) those activities have a direct and significant connection with activities in, or<br />
effect on, commerce in the U.S. or (ii) contravene such rules or regulations as the CFTC may<br />
prescribe or promulgate as are necessary or appropriate to prevent the evasion of any<br />
provision of Dodd-Frank. Under the Proposed Cross-Border Guidance, transactions covered<br />
by U.S. regulations would include those involving U.S. persons, as well as other that may have<br />
U.S. connections.<br />
A "U.S. person" is defined broadly by the Proposed Cross-Border Guidance, and would<br />
include:<br />
(a)<br />
any natural person who is a U.S. resident;<br />
(b) any corporation, partnership or other entity either (i) that is organized<br />
or incorporated under the laws of the U.S. or a state thereof or having its principal place of<br />
business in the U.S. or (ii) in which the direct or indirect owners are responsible for the<br />
liabilities of such entity and one or more of such owners is a U.S. person;<br />
(c)<br />
is a U.S. person;<br />
any individual account (discretionary or not) where the beneficial owner<br />
135
(d) (i) any commodity pool or collective investment vehicle (regardless of<br />
where it is organized) of which a majority ownership is held, directly or indirectly, by a U.S.<br />
person or persons and (ii) any commodity pool the operator of which would be required to<br />
register as a commodity pool operator under the CEA;<br />
(e) any pension plan for employees, officers or principles of a legal entity<br />
with its principal place of business in the U.S.; and<br />
(f)<br />
regardless of source.<br />
an estate or trust, the income of which is subject to U.S. income tax<br />
2. Registration and Regulation of Non-U.S. SDs and MSPs<br />
In order to determine whether a non-U.S. entity must register as an SD because it<br />
exceeds the de minimis threshold of swap dealing transactions, (i) it would only need to<br />
count swap dealing activity with U.S. persons and swaps guaranteed by U.S. persons and (ii)<br />
would only be required to aggregate transactions of its non-U.S. affiliates with U.S. persons.<br />
In order to determine whether a non-U.S. entity must register as an MSP, only swaps with U.S.<br />
persons would count toward the relevant thresholds (not swaps guaranteed by U.S. persons).<br />
Non-U.S. persons which fall into these categories and that exceed the de minimis thresholds<br />
for SDs or the position thresholds for MSPs would be required to register with the CFTC and<br />
would be subject to the CEA and CFTC regulations, though the Proposed Cross-Border<br />
Guidance would provide limited relief from some of the requirements under those<br />
regulations.<br />
"Transaction-level requirements", including mandatory clearing and swap processing,<br />
margin for uncleared swaps, trade execution requirements, trading relationship<br />
documentation portfolio reconciliation and compression, real-time public reporting, trade<br />
confirmation, daily trading records and business conduct rules, would apply to all<br />
transactions between registered non-U.S. SDs or MSPs and U.S. persons. All transaction-level<br />
requirements, other than business conduct rules, would also apply to transactions with<br />
certain non-U.S. persons (e.g., those that are guaranteed by a U.S. person or if the non-U.S.<br />
person acting as a conduit for a U.S. person); however, for a non-U.S. person is acting as a<br />
conduit for a U.S. person, substituted compliance with comparable home country rules may<br />
be permitted so long as such home country rules are comparable with relevant U.S.<br />
regulations. This means that the transaction-level requirements would not apply to<br />
transactions between a registered non-U.S. SD or MSP and other non-U.S. persons without a<br />
U.S. connection.<br />
"Entity-level requirements", including capital requirements, appointment of a chief<br />
compliance officer, risk management, and swap data recordkeeping and reporting, would<br />
apply to all registered non-U.S. SDs and MSPs; however such entities may be able to rely on<br />
substituted compliance with home country requirements so long as such requirements are<br />
comparable with relevant U.S. regulations.<br />
136
3. Regulation of Other Non-U.S. Market Participants<br />
Various regulatory requirements apply to non-SD/MSP market participants, including<br />
clearing, trade-execution, and public and SDR reporting and record-keeping requirements.<br />
Under the Proposed Cross-Border Guidance, such requirements would apply to any swap<br />
where at least one of the parties is a U.S. person, regardless of the location or subject of the<br />
transaction or the activities of the parties in connection with the transaction. In certain<br />
circumstances, non-U.S. persons would be permitted to rely on substituted compliance with<br />
home country requirements so long as such requirements are comparable with relevant U.S.<br />
regulations.<br />
4. Compliance Phase-In<br />
The Proposed Cross-Border Guidance includes a delayed timetable for compliance<br />
with regulatory requirements for non-U.S. SDs, MSPs and other market participants.<br />
137
VIII.<br />
SUMMARY OF COMPLIANCE DATES<br />
Below is a summary of CFTC and SEC swaps rules that have been enacted thus far.<br />
September 29, 2011<br />
October 31, 2011<br />
CFTC rules regarding the process for review of swaps for<br />
mandatory clearing became effective. The SEC rules<br />
regarding the process for review of security-based swaps for<br />
mandatory clearing will become effective 30 days after the<br />
publication of such rules in the Federal Register; however, the<br />
compliance date for SBS CA submissions is 60 days after the<br />
SEC issues its first written determination on whether a<br />
security-based swap (or group, category, type or class of<br />
security-based swap) is subject to mandatory clearing.<br />
CFTC rules regarding registration and regulation of SDRs (the<br />
CFTC noted, however, that while SDRs can register, they will<br />
not otherwise be fully operational on such effective date but<br />
instead will require a compliance period based on the R&R<br />
rules and the real-time reporting rules)<br />
October 12, <strong>2012</strong> CFTC regulations regarding reporting and<br />
recordkeeping of swap data by SDs and MSPs for<br />
credit swaps and interest rate swaps (including<br />
historical swaps)<br />
SDs and MSPs must comply with the CFTC’s business<br />
conduct rules by the later of (i) October 14, <strong>2012</strong> and<br />
(ii) the date on which the SDs or MSPs are required to<br />
apply for registration with the CFTC<br />
October 17, <strong>2012</strong><br />
May 6, <strong>2012</strong><br />
June 1, <strong>2012</strong><br />
August 30, <strong>2012</strong><br />
DCMs must comply with the CFTC’s core principles rules<br />
(other than the core principle requiring open access, which<br />
has a different compliance date).<br />
Core principles for DCOs (with a few exceptions, the<br />
compliance date for which will be November 8, <strong>2012</strong>).<br />
SDs and MSPs that are currently regulated by a U.S.<br />
prudential regulator or are registered with the SEC, must<br />
comply with the CFTC’s recordkeeping rules by the later of (i)<br />
June 1, <strong>2012</strong> and (ii) the date on which the SDs or MSPs are<br />
required to apply for registration with the CFTC<br />
SDs and MSPs that are not currently regulated by a U.S.<br />
138
prudential regulator or are registered with the SEC, must<br />
comply with the CFTC’s recordkeeping rules by the later of (i)<br />
August 30, <strong>2012</strong> and (ii) the date on which the SDs or MSPs<br />
are required to apply for registration with the CFTC<br />
December 11, <strong>2012</strong><br />
December 31, <strong>2012</strong><br />
January 13, <strong>2012</strong><br />
February 28, 2013<br />
April 10, 2013<br />
CFTC position limits rules.<br />
SDs will be required to register with the CFTC on the earlier of<br />
(i) December 31, <strong>2012</strong> or (ii) within 2 months following the<br />
end of the month in which it exceeds the applicable de<br />
minimis threshold of aggregate notional amount of swaps<br />
executed.<br />
CFTC regulations regarding reporting and recordkeeping of<br />
swap data by SDs and MSPs for equity swaps, foreign<br />
exchange swaps and other commodity swaps (including<br />
historical swaps)<br />
MSPs will be required to register with the CFTC.<br />
CFTC regulations regarding reporting and recordkeeping of<br />
swap data for non-SDs/MSPs (including historical swaps)<br />
139
KEY PRACTICE AREAS<br />
ART LAW<br />
CORPORATE<br />
Asset-Based Finance<br />
Asset-Based Lending<br />
Bank Regulatory<br />
Business Divorce<br />
Commercial Lending<br />
Corporate Finance<br />
Corporate Real Estate and REITs<br />
Entrepreneurship<br />
Franchising<br />
Health Care<br />
Hedge Funds<br />
Inbound Investment/International<br />
Independent Private Equity Sponsors<br />
Institutional Lending<br />
Investment Management<br />
Leveraged Buyouts<br />
Mergers & Acquisitions, Joint Ventures and<br />
Strategic Alliances<br />
New <strong>Markets</strong> Tax Credits<br />
Private Equity<br />
Registered Investment Companies<br />
Securities<br />
Tax-Exempt Organizations<br />
Venture <strong>Capital</strong>/Emerging Growth<br />
EMPLOYMENT<br />
Corporate Compliance<br />
Employee Benefits and Executive Compensation<br />
Employment Litigation<br />
ERISA Litigation<br />
Risk Management Services<br />
GOVERNMENT RELATIONS<br />
INSURANCE & REINSURANCE<br />
Insurance Coverage Litigation<br />
Reinsurance Disputes<br />
Transactional/Regulatory<br />
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY<br />
Litigation and Enforcement<br />
Transactional<br />
International<br />
LITIGATION<br />
Alternative Dispute Resolution<br />
Business Divorce<br />
Class Action Defense<br />
Commercial Litigation<br />
Construction Litigation<br />
Product Liability<br />
Real Estate Litigation<br />
Records Retention<br />
Securities and Derivatives Litigation<br />
and Regulatory Group<br />
Title Insurance<br />
White Collar Defense<br />
REAL ESTATE<br />
Acquisitions & Sales<br />
Cooperatives & Condominiums<br />
Corporate Real Estate & REITs<br />
Development and Construction<br />
Economic Incentive Programs<br />
Environmental & Green Building<br />
Health Care - Real Estate<br />
Hospitality<br />
Inbound Foreign Investment<br />
Joint Ventures - Public and Private<br />
Land Use & Environmental<br />
Leasing<br />
Real Estate Loan Workouts, Restructuring &<br />
Foreclosures<br />
Real Estate Finance<br />
Real Estate Litigation<br />
RESTRUCTURING & BANKRUPTCY<br />
SPORTS<br />
Complex Financings<br />
Purchase and Sale of Teams<br />
Naming Rights, Licensing Agreements and<br />
Sponsorships<br />
Intellectual Property and New Media<br />
Bankruptcy and Restructuring<br />
Sports Business<br />
TAX & PERSONAL PLANNING<br />
Family Businesses<br />
International Income and Estate Planning<br />
Mergers & Acquisitions<br />
Trusts & Estates<br />
Family Businesses<br />
Personal Planning<br />
Tax Forbearance for Non-U.S. Citizens<br />
NEW YORK<br />
2 Park Avenue<br />
New York, NY 10016<br />
t 212.592.1400<br />
f 212.592.1500<br />
NEWARK<br />
One Gateway Center<br />
Newark, NJ 07102<br />
t 973.274.2000<br />
f 973.247.2500<br />
PRINCETON<br />
210 Carnegie Center<br />
Princeton, NJ 08540<br />
t 609.452.3800<br />
f 609.520.9095<br />
>> WWW.HERRICK.COM
NEW YORK<br />
2 Park Avenue<br />
New York, NY 10016<br />
t 212.592.1400<br />
f 212.592.1500<br />
NEWARK<br />
One Gateway Center<br />
Newark, NJ 07102<br />
t 973.274.2000<br />
f 973.247.2500<br />
PRINCETON<br />
210 Carnegie Center<br />
Princeton, NJ 08540<br />
t 609.452.3800<br />
f 609.520.9095<br />
>> WWW.HERRICK.COM